Siemens IEEE802.11 Operating instructions

nSCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE
1
___________________
Introduction
802.11n Web Based Management
2
___________________
Description
SIMATIC NET
3
___________________
Technical basics
Industrial Wireless LAN
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE
802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual
4
___________________
Assignment of an IP address
Configuring with Web Based
5
___________________
Management
6
___________________
Upkeep and maintenance
7
___________________
Troubleshooting/FAQ
___________________
A
Appendix A
___________________
B
Appendix B
___________________
C
Appendix C
___________________
D
Appendix D
11/2014
C79000-G8976-C323-03
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Division Digital Factory
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
C79000-G8976-C323-02
Ⓟ 12/2014 Subject to change
Copyright © Siemens AG 2013 - 2014.
All rights reserved
Table of contents
1
2
3
4
Introduction ............................................................................................................................................. 9
1.1
Information on the Configuration Manual.................................................................................. 9
1.2
Security information ................................................................................................................11
1.3
Type designations ...................................................................................................................11
Description ............................................................................................................................................ 13
2.1
Network structures ..................................................................................................................13
2.2
Possible applications of SCALANCE W700 devices ..............................................................17
2.3
Product characteristics............................................................................................................18
2.4
IEEE 802.11n ..........................................................................................................................20
2.5
Requirements for installation and operation of SCALANCE W700 devices ...........................23
2.6
C-PLUG and KEY-PLUG ........................................................................................................23
2.7
Power over Ethernet (PoE) .....................................................................................................24
Technical basics ................................................................................................................................... 29
3.1
VLAN .......................................................................................................................................29
3.2
MAC-based communication ....................................................................................................29
3.3
iPCF / iPCF-MC ......................................................................................................................31
3.4
iREF ........................................................................................................................................33
3.5
AeroScout ...............................................................................................................................35
3.6
NAT/NAPT ..............................................................................................................................36
3.7
SNMP ......................................................................................................................................37
3.8
3.8.1
Spanning Tree ........................................................................................................................38
RSTP, MSTP, CIST ................................................................................................................39
Assignment of an IP address................................................................................................................. 41
4.1
Structure of an IP address ......................................................................................................41
4.2
Initial assignment of an IP address .........................................................................................42
4.3
Address assignment with DHCP .............................................................................................42
4.4
Address assignment with the Primary Setup Tool ..................................................................43
4.5
Address assignment with STEP 7 ..........................................................................................44
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
3
Table of contents
5
Configuring with Web Based Management ............................................................................................ 45
5.1
Web Based Management ...................................................................................................... 45
5.2
Login ...................................................................................................................................... 46
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
5.3.1.2
5.3.1.3
5.3.1.4
5.3.1.5
5.3.1.6
5.3.1.7
5.3.1.8
5.3.1.9
5.3.1.10
5.3.1.11
5.3.1.12
5.3.1.13
"Wizard" menu ....................................................................................................................... 49
Basic Wizard .......................................................................................................................... 49
System Settings ..................................................................................................................... 50
Country Settings..................................................................................................................... 52
IP Address Settings ............................................................................................................... 53
Management Interfaces ......................................................................................................... 54
Antenna Settings .................................................................................................................... 56
Radio Settings ........................................................................................................................ 57
Access Point Settings ............................................................................................................ 60
Client Settings ........................................................................................................................ 62
Client Allowed Channel Settings ............................................................................................ 64
Security Settings .................................................................................................................... 65
Dot1x Supplicant Settings ...................................................................................................... 68
Dot1x RADIUS Server Settings ............................................................................................. 69
Summary of Settings .............................................................................................................. 70
5.4
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.5.1
5.4.5.2
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
5.4.8.1
5.4.8.2
5.4.8.3
5.4.8.4
5.4.9
5.4.10
5.4.11
5.4.11.1
5.4.11.2
5.4.11.3
5.4.11.4
5.4.11.5
5.4.11.6
5.4.11.7
5.4.12
5.4.12.1
5.4.12.2
5.4.12.3
5.4.12.4
5.4.12.5
5.4.13
"Information" menu................................................................................................................. 71
Start Page .............................................................................................................................. 71
Versions ................................................................................................................................. 75
I&M ......................................................................................................................................... 77
ARP Table .............................................................................................................................. 78
Log Tables ............................................................................................................................. 79
Events .................................................................................................................................... 79
WLAN Authentication Log ...................................................................................................... 81
Faults ..................................................................................................................................... 82
Redundancy ........................................................................................................................... 83
Ethernet Statistics .................................................................................................................. 87
Interface statistics .................................................................................................................. 87
Packet Size ............................................................................................................................ 88
Packet Type ........................................................................................................................... 89
Packet Error ........................................................................................................................... 90
Learning Table ....................................................................................................................... 92
DHCP Server ......................................................................................................................... 93
WLAN ..................................................................................................................................... 94
Overview AP .......................................................................................................................... 94
Client List ............................................................................................................................... 97
WDS List ................................................................................................................................ 98
Overlap AP ........................................................................................................................... 100
Overview Client .................................................................................................................... 101
Available AP ......................................................................................................................... 103
IP Mapping Table ................................................................................................................. 105
WLAN Statistics ................................................................................................................... 107
Errors ................................................................................................................................... 107
Management Sent ................................................................................................................ 109
Management Received ........................................................................................................ 111
Data Sent ............................................................................................................................. 113
Data Received...................................................................................................................... 115
WLAN iFeatures ................................................................................................................... 116
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
4
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Table of contents
5.4.13.1
5.4.13.2
5.4.13.3
5.4.14
5.4.14.1
iREF Client List .....................................................................................................................116
iREF WDS List ......................................................................................................................117
AeroScout .............................................................................................................................118
Security .................................................................................................................................120
Inter AP blocking ...................................................................................................................120
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.7.1
5.5.7.2
5.5.7.3
5.5.8
5.5.8.1
5.5.8.2
5.5.9
5.5.10
5.5.10.1
5.5.10.2
5.5.10.3
5.5.10.4
5.5.11
5.5.11.1
5.5.11.2
5.5.11.3
5.5.11.4
5.5.12
5.5.12.1
5.5.12.2
5.5.12.3
5.5.12.4
5.5.12.5
5.5.12.6
5.5.13
5.5.14
5.5.15
5.5.15.1
5.5.15.2
5.5.16
5.5.17
5.5.17.1
5.5.17.2
5.5.18
"System" menu .....................................................................................................................122
System Configuration............................................................................................................122
General .................................................................................................................................125
Device ...................................................................................................................................125
Coordinates ...........................................................................................................................126
Agent IP ................................................................................................................................128
DNS Client ............................................................................................................................130
Restart ..................................................................................................................................131
Commit Control .....................................................................................................................134
Load&Save ...........................................................................................................................135
HTTP .....................................................................................................................................137
TFTP .....................................................................................................................................140
Passwords ............................................................................................................................143
Events ...................................................................................................................................145
Configuration .........................................................................................................................145
Severity Filter ........................................................................................................................147
SMTP Client ..........................................................................................................................148
DHCP ....................................................................................................................................150
DHCP Client ..........................................................................................................................150
DHCP Server ........................................................................................................................152
DHCP Options ......................................................................................................................154
Static Leases ........................................................................................................................156
SNMP ....................................................................................................................................157
General .................................................................................................................................157
Traps .....................................................................................................................................159
v3 Groups .............................................................................................................................160
v3 Users ................................................................................................................................162
System Time .........................................................................................................................164
Manual Setting ......................................................................................................................165
DST Overview .......................................................................................................................166
DST Configuration ................................................................................................................168
SNTP Client ..........................................................................................................................172
NTP Client .............................................................................................................................175
SIMATIC Time Client ............................................................................................................177
Auto Logout ...........................................................................................................................178
Syslog Client .........................................................................................................................179
Fault Monitoring ....................................................................................................................180
Power Supply ........................................................................................................................180
Link Change ..........................................................................................................................182
PNIO .....................................................................................................................................183
PLUG ....................................................................................................................................185
Configuration .........................................................................................................................185
License ..................................................................................................................................188
Ping .......................................................................................................................................191
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
5
Table of contents
5.6
5.6.1
5.6.1.1
5.6.1.2
5.6.2
5.6.2.1
5.6.2.2
5.6.2.3
5.6.2.4
5.6.2.5
5.6.2.6
5.6.2.7
5.6.2.8
5.6.2.9
5.6.2.10
5.6.2.11
"Interfaces" menu ................................................................................................................. 192
Ethernet ................................................................................................................................ 192
Overview .............................................................................................................................. 192
Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 193
WLAN ................................................................................................................................... 195
Basic .................................................................................................................................... 195
Advanced ............................................................................................................................. 199
Antennas .............................................................................................................................. 201
Allowed Channels ................................................................................................................ 204
802.11n ................................................................................................................................ 206
AP ........................................................................................................................................ 207
AP WDS ............................................................................................................................... 210
AP 802.11a/b/g Rates .......................................................................................................... 212
AP 802.11n Rates ................................................................................................................ 214
Client .................................................................................................................................... 217
Signal Recorder ................................................................................................................... 220
5.7
5.7.1
5.7.1.1
5.7.1.2
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.3.1
5.7.3.2
5.7.3.3
5.7.3.4
5.7.3.5
5.7.4
5.7.5
"Layer 2" menu..................................................................................................................... 225
VLAN .................................................................................................................................... 225
General ................................................................................................................................ 225
Port-based VLAN ................................................................................................................. 228
Dynamic MAC Aging ............................................................................................................ 230
Spanning Tree...................................................................................................................... 231
General ................................................................................................................................ 231
CIST General ....................................................................................................................... 233
CIST Port ............................................................................................................................. 235
MST general......................................................................................................................... 239
MST Port .............................................................................................................................. 240
DCP Forwarding................................................................................................................... 242
LLDP .................................................................................................................................... 243
5.8
5.8.1
5.8.1.1
5.8.1.2
"Layer 3" menu..................................................................................................................... 245
NAT ...................................................................................................................................... 245
Basic .................................................................................................................................... 245
NAPT .................................................................................................................................... 246
5.9
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.2.1
5.9.2.2
5.9.2.3
5.9.2.4
5.9.2.5
5.9.3
5.9.4
5.9.4.1
5.9.4.2
"Security" menu.................................................................................................................... 248
Passwords ............................................................................................................................ 248
WLAN ................................................................................................................................... 249
Basic .................................................................................................................................... 249
AP Communication .............................................................................................................. 252
AP Radius Authenticator ...................................................................................................... 254
Client Radius Supplicant ...................................................................................................... 256
Keys ..................................................................................................................................... 257
Management ACL ................................................................................................................ 258
Inter AP blocking .................................................................................................................. 260
Basic .................................................................................................................................... 260
Allowed address ................................................................................................................... 262
5.10
5.10.1
5.10.2
5.10.3
5.10.4
"iFeatures" menu.................................................................................................................. 263
iPCF ..................................................................................................................................... 263
iPCF-MC .............................................................................................................................. 266
iREF ..................................................................................................................................... 268
AeroScout ............................................................................................................................ 269
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
6
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Table of contents
6
7
A
Upkeep and maintenance ................................................................................................................... 271
6.1
Firmware update - via WBM .................................................................................................271
6.2
Restoring the default parameter settings ..............................................................................272
Troubleshooting/FAQ .......................................................................................................................... 273
7.1
Firmware update via WBM or CLI not possible ....................................................................273
7.2
Disrupted data transmission due to the received power being too high ...............................274
7.3
Compatibility with predecessor products ..............................................................................275
7.4
Instructions for secure network design .................................................................................275
Appendix A ......................................................................................................................................... 277
A.1
B
Appendix B ......................................................................................................................................... 279
B.1
C
Private MIB variables of the SCALANCE W700 ...................................................................279
Appendix C ......................................................................................................................................... 281
C.1
D
MIB files supported by SCALANCE W700 ...........................................................................277
Underlying standards ............................................................................................................281
Appendix D ......................................................................................................................................... 283
D.1
Messages in the event log ....................................................................................................283
D.2
Messages in the WLAN authentication log ...........................................................................287
Index................................................................................................................................................... 289
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
7
Table of contents
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
8
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
1
Introduction
1.1
Information on the Configuration Manual
Validity of the configuration manual
This Configuration Manual covers the following products:
● SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
● SCALANCE W774-1 RJ-45
This Configuration Manual applies to the following software version:
● SCALANCE W700 firmware as of Version V 5.00
Purpose of the Configuration Manual
This Configuration Manual is intended to provide you with the information you require to
commission and operate devices correctly. It explains how to configure the devices and how
to integrate them in a WLAN network.
The operating instructions for the corresponding device describe how to install and connect
up the devices correctly.
Orientation in the documentation
Apart from the Configuration Manual you are currently reading, the following documentation
is also available from SIMATIC NET on the topic of Industrial Wireless LANs:
● Configuration Manual: SCALANCE W770 / W730 Command Line Interface
This document contains the CLI commands that are supported by SCALANCE W700
devices.
● Performance data 802.11 abgn SCALANCE W770/W730
This document contains information about the frequency, modulation, transmit power and
receiver sensitivity.
● SCALANCE W734-1/W774-1 Operating Instructions
This document contains information on installing and connecting up the following
products and their approvals.
– SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
– SCALANCE W774-1 RJ-45
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
9
Introduction
1.1 Information on the Configuration Manual
● System Manual Structure of an Industrial Wireless LAN
Apart from the description of the physical basics and a presentation of the main IEEE
standards, this also contains information on data security and a description of the
industrial applications of wireless LAN.
You should read this manual if you want to set up WLAN networks with a more complex
structure (not simply a connection between two devices).
● System manual RCoax
This system manual contains both an explanation of the fundamental technical aspects
as well as a description of the individual RCoax components and their functionality.
Installation/commissioning and connection of RCoax components and their operating
principle are explained. The possible applications of the various SIMATIC NET
components are described.
● System manual - Passive Network Components IWLAN
This system manual explains the entire IWLAN cabling that you require for your IWLAN
application. For a flexible combination and installation of the individual IWLAN
components both indoors and outdoors, a wide ranging selection of compatible coaxial
accessories are available. The system manual also covers connecting cables as well as a
variety of plug-in connectors, lightning protectors, a power splitter and an attenuator.
SIMATIC NET manuals
You will find SIMATIC NET manuals on the Internet pages of Siemens Industry Online
Support:
● Using the search function:
support.automation.siemens.com
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/llisapi.dll?func=cslib.csinfo2&aktprim=99&la
ng=en)
Enter the entry ID of the relevant manual as the search item.
● In the navigation panel on the left-hand side in the area "Industrial Communication":
Industrial communication
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/llisapi.dll?func=cslib.csinfo&lang=de&siteid=
csius&aktprim=0&extranet=standard&viewreg=WW&objid=10805878&treeLang=en)
Go to the required product group and make the following settings:
tab "Entry list", Entry type "Manuals"
You will find the documentation for the SIMATIC NET products relevant here on the data
storage medium that ships with some products:
● Product CD / product DVD
● SIMATIC NET Manual Collection
● SIMATIC NET IWLAN CD
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
10
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Introduction
1.2 Security information
Further documentation
The "SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Network Manual" contains information on other
SIMATIC NET products that you can operate along with the devices of this product line in an
Industrial Ethernet network. There, you will find among other things optical performance data
of the communication partners that you require for the installation.
The "SIMATIC NET Industrial Ethernet Network Manual" can be found on the Internet pages
of Siemens Industry Online Support under the following entry ID:
27069465 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/27069465)
1.2
Security information
Siemens provides automation and drive products with industrial security functions that
support the secure operation of plants or machines. They are an important component in a
holistic industrial security concept. With this in mind, our products undergo continuous
development. We therefore recommend that you keep yourself informed with respect to our
product updates. Please find further information and newsletters on this subject at:
http://support.automation.siemens.com.
To ensure the secure operation of a plant or machine it is also necessary to take suitable
preventive action (e.g. cell protection concept) and to integrate the automation and drive
components into a state-of-the-art holistic industrial security concept for the entire plant or
machine. Any third-party products that may be in use must also be taken into account.
Please find further information at: http://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity
1.3
Type designations
Abbreviations used
The information in the manuals for the SCALANCE W700 product family often applies to
more than one product variant. In such situations, the designations of the products are
shortened to avoid having to list all the type designations. The following table shows how the
abbreviations relate to the product variants.
Product group
The designation . . . stands
for . . .
Product name
Access point
W774-1
SCALANCE W774-1 RJ-45
Client
W734-1
SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
All SCALANCE W devices
W700
SCALANCE W774-1 RJ-45
SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
11
Introduction
1.3 Type designations
The type designation of a SCALANCE W700 is made up of several parts that have the
following meaning:
SIMATIC NET glossary
Explanations of many of the specialist terms used in this documentation can be found in the
SIMATIC NET glossary.
You will find the SIMATIC NET glossary here:
● SIMATIC NET Manual Collection or product DVD
The DVD ships with certain SIMATIC NET products.
● On the Internet under the following entry ID:
50305045 (http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50305045)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
12
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
2
Description
2.1
Network structures
The following article deals with the setting up of various network structures using access
points and clients. A client is also an access point in client mode.
Standalone configuration with access point
This configuration does not require a server and the access point does not have a
connection to a wired Ethernet. Within its transmission range, the access point forwards data
from one WLAN node to another.
The wireless network has a unique name. All the devices exchanging data within this
network must be configured with this name.
Figure 2-1
Standalone configuration of an access point. The gray area symbolizes the wireless
range of the access point.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
13
Description
2.1 Network structures
Wireless access to a wired Ethernet network
If one (or more) access points have access to wired Ethernet, the following applications are
possible:
● A single device as gateway:
A wireless network can be connected to a wired network via an access point.
● Span of wireless coverage for the wireless network with several access points:
The access points are all configured with the same unique SSID (network name). All
nodes that want to communicate over this network must also be configured with this
SSID.
If a mobile station moves from the area covered by one access point to the area covered
by another access point, the wireless link is maintained (roaming).
Figure 2-2
Wireless connection of a mobile station over two cells (roaming)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
14
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.1 Network structures
Multichannel configuration
If neighboring access points use the same frequency channel, this can lead to longer
response times due to any collisions that may occur. If the configuration shown in the figure
is implemented as a single-channel system, computers A and B cannot communicate at the
same time with the access points in their wireless cells.
If neighboring access points are set up for different frequencies, this leads to a considerable
improvement in performance. As a result, neighboring wireless cells each have their own
medium available and the delays resulting from time-offset transmission no longer occur.
The channel spacing should be as large as possible; a practical value is 25 MHz. Even in a
multichannel configuration, all access points can be configured with the same network name.
Figure 2-3
Multichannel configuration on channels 1 and 2 with four access points
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
15
Description
2.1 Network structures
Wireless Distribution System (WDS)
WDS allows direct links between access points and or between access points and other
WDS-compliant devices. These are used to create a wireless backbone or to connect an
individual access point to a network that cannot be connected directly to the cable
infrastructure due to its location.
Two alternative configurations are possible. The WDS partner can be configured using the
WDS ID or using its MAC address.
Figure 2-4
Implementation of WDS with four access points
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
16
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.2 Possible applications of SCALANCE W700 devices
Network access with a client or an access point in client mode
The device can be used to integrate wired Ethernet devices (for example SIMATIC S7 PLC)
in a wireless network.
Figure 2-5
2.2
Connecting a SIMATIC S7 PLC to a wireless LAN.
Possible applications of SCALANCE W700 devices
Note
The SIMATIC NET WLAN products use OpenSSL.
This is open source code with license conditions (BSD).
Please refer to the current license conditions.
Since the driver includes encryption software, you should also adhere to the appropriate
regulations for your specific country.
Possible applications of the SCALANCE W774
The SCALANCE W774 is equipped with two Ethernet interfaces and a WLAN interface. This
makes the device suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W774 forwards data within its transmission range from one node to
another without a connection to wired Ethernet being necessary.
● The SCALANCE W774 can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
● The SCALANCE W774 can be used as a wireless bridge between two networks.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
17
Description
2.3 Product characteristics
● The SCALANCE W774 can be used as a bridge between two different frequencies.
● The SCALANCE W774 supports protection class IP30.
Possible applications of the SCALANCE W734
The SCALANCE W734 is equipped with two Ethernet interfaces and a WLAN interface. This
makes the device suitable for the following applications:
● The SCALANCE W734 forwards data within its transmission range from one node to
another without a connection to wired Ethernet being necessary.
● The SCALANCE W734 can be used as a gateway from a wired to a wireless network.
● The SCALANCE W734 can be used as a wireless bridge between two networks.
2.3
Product characteristics
Properties of the SCALANCE W700 devices
● The Ethernet interface supports the following:
– 10 Mbps and 100 Mbps both in full and half duplex
– Autocrossing
– Autopolarity
● Operating the WLAN interface in the frequency bands 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz.
● The WLAN interface is compatible with the standards IEEE 802.11a , IEEE 802.11b , and
IEEE 802.11g. In the 802.11a and 802.11g mode, the gross transmission rate is up to 54
Mbps.
● IEEE 802.11n
– High-speed WLAN standard (wireless LAN)
– Can operate in the 2.4 GHz and in the 5 GHz range
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
18
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.3 Product characteristics
● IEEE 802.11h - Supplement to IEEE 802.11a
In the 802.11h mode, the methods "Transmit Power Control (TPC)" as well as "Dynamic
Frequency Selection (DFS)" are used in the range 5.25 - 5.35 and 5.47 - 5.75 GHz. In
some countries, this allows the frequency subband of 5.47 - 5.725 GHz to be used in the
outdoor area even with higher transmit powers.
TPC is a method of adapting the transmit power.
With DFS, the access point searches for primary users for 60 seconds before starting
communication on the selected channel. During this time the access point does not send
beacons. If signals are found on the channel, the channel is blocked for 30 minutes, the
access point changes channel and repeats the check. Primary users are also searched
for during operation.
● Support of the authentication standards WPA, WPA-PSK, WPA2, WPA2-PSK and
IEEE 802.1x and the encryption methods WEP, AES and TKIP.
Note
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11n with the setting "802.11n" or "802.11n only"
supports only WPA2/WPA2-PSK with AES in the security settings.
● For better transmission via WLAN, the function WMM (wireless multimedia) is enabled.
The frames are evaluated according to their priority and sent prioritized via the WLAN
interface.
● Suitable for inclusion of a RADIUS server for authentication.
● Device-related and application-related monitoring of the wireless connection.
● The interoperability of the devices with Wi-Fi devices of other vendors was tested
thoroughly.
● Before commissioning the SCALANCE W700, check the wireless conditions on site. If
you intend to use Industrial Wireless LAN systems and WirelessHART systems in the 2.4
GHz band, you will need to plan the use of the channels. At all costs, avoid parallel use of
overlapping frequency ranges. The following overlaps exist with Industrial Wireless LAN
and WirelessHART:
IWLAN channel
IEEE 802.11 b/g/n
WHART channel
IEEE 802.15.4
1
11 - 16
6
15 - 20
7
16 - 21
11
20 - 25
13
21 - 25
Note
All SCALANCE W700 access points can be reconfigured for client mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
19
Description
2.4 IEEE 802.11n
Features of the SCALANCE W700
Type
Number of
WLAN
ports
Antennas
Number and
type of Ethernet
interface
Degree of
protection
Order no.
SCALANCE W774-1 RJ-45
1
external
2 x 10/100 Mbps IP30
Ethernet (copper)
6GK5774-1FC00-0AA0
6GK5774-1FC00-0AB0 (1)
SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
1
external
2 x 10/100 Mbps IP30
Ethernet (copper)
6GK5734-1FC00-0AA0
6GK5734-1FC00-0AB0 (1)
(1) US variant
2.4
IEEE 802.11n
Overview
The standard IEEE 802.11n is an expansion of the 802.11 standard and was approved in
2009.
Previous standards worked either in the 2.4 GHz frequency band (IEEE 802.11g /b) or in the
5 GHz frequency band (IEEE 802.11a). IEEE 802.11n can operate in both frequency band.
In the IEEE 802.11n standard, there are mechanisms implemented in PHY and MAC layers
that increase the data throughput and improve the wireless coverage.
● MIMO antenna technology
● Maximum ratio combining (MRC)
● Spatial multiplexing
● Channel bonding
● Frame aggregation
● Accelerated guard interval
● Modulation and coding scheme
● Data throughput rates up to 450 Mbps (gross)
This is not possible on all devices.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
20
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.4 IEEE 802.11n
MIMO antenna technology
MIMO (Multiple Input - Multiple Output) is based on an intelligent multiple antenna system.
The transmitter and the receiver have several spatially separate antennas. The spatially
separate antennas transmit the data streams at the same time. Up to four data streams are
possible. The data streams are transmitted over spatially separate paths and return over
different paths due to diffraction, refraction, fading and reflection (multipath propagation).
The multipath propagation means that at the point of reception a complex, space- and timedependent pattern results as a total signal made up of the individual signals sent. MIMO
uses this unique pattern by detecting the spatial position of characteristic signals. Here, each
spatial position is different from the neighboring position. By characterizing the individual
senders, the recipient is capable of separating several signals from each other.
Maximum ratio combining (MRC)
In a multiple antenna system, the wireless signals are received by the individual antennas
and combined to form one signal. The MRC method is used to combine the wireless signals.
The MRC method weights the wireless signals according to their signal-to-noise ratio and
combines the wireless signals to form one signal. The signal-to-noise ratio is improved and
the error rate is reduced.
Spatial mutliplexing
With spatial multiplexing, different information is sent using the same frequency. The data
stream is distributed over n transmitting antennas; in other words, each antenna sends only
1/n of the data stream. The division of the data stream is restricted by the number of
antennas. At the receiver end, the signal is reconstructed.
Due to the spatial multiplexing, there is a higher signal-to-noise ratio and a higher data
throughput.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
21
Description
2.4 IEEE 802.11n
Channel bonding
With IEEE 802.11n, data can be transferred via two directly neighboring channels. The two
20 MHz channels are put together to form one channel with 40 MHz. This allows the channel
bandwidth to be doubled and the data throughput to be increased.
To be able to use channel bonding, the recipient must support 40 MHz transmissions. If the
recipient does not support 40 MHz transmissions, the band is automatically reduced to 20
MHz. This means that IEEE 802.11n can also communicate with IEEE 802.11a/b/g devices.
The channel bonding is set on the "AP" WBM page with the "HT Channel Width [MHz]"
parameter.
Frame aggregation
With IEEE 802.11n, it is possible to group together individual data packets to form a single
larger packet; this is known as frame aggregation. There are two types of frame aggregation:
Aggregated MAC Protocol Data Unit (A-MPDU) and Aggregated MAC Service Data Unit (AMSDU).
The frame aggregation reduces the packet overheads. Frame aggregation can only be used
if the individual data packets are intended for the same receiving station (client).
The W700 devices support both types of frame aggregation. You specify the settings for the
A-MPDU data packet on the "AP 802.11n" WBM page.
Accelerated guard interval
The guard interval prevents different transmissions being mixed together. In
telecommunications, this mixing is also known as intersymbol interference (ISI).
When the send time has elapsed, a send pause (guard interval) must be kept to before the
next transmission begins.
The guard interval of IEEE 802.11a /b/g is 800 ns. IEEE 802.11n can use the reduced guard
interval of 400 ns. You specify the guard interval on the "AP 802.11n" WBM page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
22
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.5 Requirements for installation and operation of SCALANCE W700 devices
Modulation and coding schemes
The IEEE 802.11n standard supports different data rates. The data rates are based on the
number of spatial streams, the modulation method and the channel coding. The various
combinations are described in modulation and coding schemes.
2.5
Requirements for installation and operation of SCALANCE W700
devices
Requirements for installation and operation of SCALANCE W700 devices
A PG/PC with a network connection must be available in order to configure
SCALANCE W700 devices. If no DHCP server is available, a PC on which the Primary
Setup Tool (PST) is installed is necessary for the initial assignment of an IP address to the
SCALANCE W700 devices. For the other configuration settings, a computer with Telnet or a
Web browser is necessary.
2.6
C-PLUG and KEY-PLUG
Configuration information on the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
The C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG stores the configuration of a device and can therefore transfer
the configuration of the old device to the new device.
NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG during operation!
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether or not a PLUG is present at one second intervals. If it is
detected that the PLUG was removed, there is a restart. If a valid KEY-PLUG was inserted
in the device, the device changes to a defined error state following the restart. With
SCALANCE W, the available wireless interfaces are deactivated in this case.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory
settings.
When the new device starts up with the PLUG, it then continues automatically with exactly
the same configuration as the old device. One exception to this can be the IP configuration if
it is set using DHCP and the DHCP server has not been reconfigured accordingly.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
23
Description
2.7 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
A reconfiguration is necessary if you use functions based on MAC addresses.
Note
In terms of the PLUG, the SCALANCE devices work in two modes:
• Without PLUG
The device stores the configuration in internal memory. This mode is active when no
PLUG is inserted.
• With PLUG
The configuration stored on the PLUG is displayed over the user interfaces. If changes
are made to the configuration, the device stores the configuration directly on the PLUG
and in the internal memory. This mode is active as soon as a PLUG is inserted. As soon
as the device is started with a PLUG inserted, the SCALANCE W700 starts up with the
configuration data on the PLUG.
Note
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version of the firmware, the configuration data can be
lost. In this case, the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been
installed. In this situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has
the status "NOT ACCEPTED" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous
more up-to-date firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date
firmware without any loss of configuration data. If the original configuration on the PLUG is
no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
License information on the KEY-PLUG
In addition to the configuration, the KEY-PLUG also contains a license that allows the use of
the iFeatures.
2.7
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
General
"Power over Ethernet" (PoE) is a power supply technique for network components according
to IEEE 802.3af or IEEE 802.3at. The power is supplied over the Ethernet cables that
connect the individual network components together. This makes an additional power cable
unnecessary. PoE can be used with all PoE-compliant network components that require little
power (max. 12.95 W).
Which Ethernet connectors of a device are capable of PoE can be found in the operating
instructions of the relevant device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
24
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.7 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Cable used for the power supply
● Variant 1 (redundant wires)
In Fast Ethernet, the wire pairs 1, 2 and 3, 6 are used to transfer data. Pairs 4, 5 and 7, 8
are then used to supply power. If there are only four wires, the voltage is modulated onto
wires 1, 2 and 3, 6 (see variant 2). This alternative is suitable for a data transmission rate
of 10/100 Mbps. This type of power supply is not suitable for 1 Gbps because with gigabit
Ethernet, all 8 wires are used for the data transmission.
● Variant 2 (phantom power)
With phantom power, the power is supplied over the pairs that are used for data transfer,
in other words, all eight (1 Gbps) or four (10/100 Mbps) wires are used both for the data
transfer and the power supply.
Whether a device supports variant 1 and variant 2 or only variant 2 can be found in the
operating instructions of the relevant device.
A PoE-compliant switch can supply the end device either using:
● Variant 1 or
● Variant 2 or
● Variant 1 and variant 2.
Endspan
With endspan, the power is supplied via a switch that can reach a device over an Ethernet
cable. The switch must be capable of PoE, for example a SCALANCE X108PoE,
SCALANCE X308-2M POE, SCALANCE XR552-12M.
Midspan
Midspan is used when the switch is not PoE-compliant. The power is supplied by an
additional device between the switch and end device. In this case, only data rates of 10/100
Mbps can be achieved because the power is supplied on redundant wires.
A Siemens power insert can also be used as the interface for the power input. Since a power
insert supports a power supply of 24 VDC, it does not conform with 802.3af or IEEE 802.3at.
The following restrictions relating to the use of power inserts should be noted:
WARNING
Operate the power insert only when the following conditions apply:
• with extra low voltages SELV, PELV complying with IEC 60364-4-41
• in USA/CAN with power supplies complying with NEC class 2
• in USA/CAN, the cabling must meet the requirements of NEC/CEC
• Power load maximum 0.5 A.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
25
Description
2.7 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Cable lengths
Table 2- 1
Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - Fast Ethernet)
Cable type
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord)
Permitted cable length
IE TP torsion cable
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 45 m
+ 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
0 to 55 m
IE FC TP Marine Cable
IE FC TP Trailing Cable
IE FC TP Flexible Cable
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 75 m
+ 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
0 to 85 m
IE FC TP standard cable
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 90 m
+ 10 m TP cord
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180
0 to 100 m
Table 2- 2
Permitted cable lengths (copper cable - gigabit Ethernet)
Cable type
Accessory (plug, outlet,
TP cord)
Permitted cable length
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 4x2
0 to 90 m
IE FC flexible cable, 4×2, 24
AWG
with IE FC RJ-45 Plug 180, 4x2
0 to 60 m
IE FC standard cable, 4×2, 22
AWG
with IE FC Outlet RJ-45
+ 10 m TP cord
0 to 100 m
+ 10 m TP cord
Table 2- 3
PIN
Fitting connectors
Color of the
wire
CAT5
Color of the
wire
CAT6a
Use
Power over
unused wires
(10/100 Mbps
only)
Phantom power
1
Yellow
Green/white
Data
Data/power
2
Orange
Green
Data
Data/power
3
White
Orange/white
Data
Data/power
6
Blue
Orange
Data
Data/power
4
Blue
Power
unused at 10/100 Mbps
5
Blue/white
Power
unused at 10/100 Mbps
7
Brown/white
Power
unused at 10/100 Mbps
8
Brown
Power
unused at 10/100 Mbps
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
26
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Description
2.7 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
LEDs for PoE on the SCALANCE W700 device
When the device is supplied by PoE, the green "PoE" LED is lit on the SCALANCE W700
device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
27
Description
2.7 Power over Ethernet (PoE)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
28
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Technical basics
3.1
3
VLAN
Network definition regardless of the spatial location of the nodes
VLAN (Virtual Local Area Network) divides a physical network into several logical networks
that are shielded from each other. Here, devices are grouped together to form logical groups.
Only nodes of the same VLAN can address each other. Since multicast and broadcast
frames are only forwarded within the particular VLAN, they are also known as broadcast
domains.
The particular advantage of VLANs is the reduced network load for the nodes and network
segments of other VLANs.
To identify which packet belongs to which VLAN, the frame is expanded by 4 bytes. This
expansion includes not only the VLAN ID but also priority information.
Options for the VLAN assignment
There are various options for the assignment to VLANs:
● Port-based VLAN
Each port of a device is assigned a VLAN ID. You configure port-based VLAN in "Layer 2
> VLAN (Page 228)".
● Protocol-based VLAN
Each port of a device is assigned a protocol group.
● Subnet-based VLAN
The IP address of the device is assigned a VLAN ID.
3.2
MAC-based communication
Adopt MAC automatically / Adopt MAC manually
Frames in the direction from the client to the access point always have the MAC address of
the WLAN interface as the source MAC address. As a result, the learning table at the access
point end always has only the MAC address of the WLAN interface of the client. If the MAC
address of a device connected to the client is adopted, both the MAC-based and the IPbased frames find their destination in precisely this device.
Communication at the MAC address level (ISO/OSI layer 2) can only be to a subscriber
downstream from the client. With IP Mapping, several subscribers downstream from a client
can be addressed based on the IP protocol.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
29
Technical basics
3.2 MAC-based communication
The access point checks whether the destination MAC address matches the MAC addresses
of the connected clients. Since a client can only adopt one MAC address, the access point
does not find a match and discards the packets of several nodes.
Maximum possible number of MAC nodes downstream from the client: 1
Notes on the "Automatic" setting:
● As long as there is no link on the Ethernet interface, the device uses the MAC address of
the Ethernet interface so that it can be reached in this status. In this status, the device
can be found using the Primary Setup Tool and configured with WBM or CLI.
● As soon as there is a link on the Ethernet interface, the device adopts the source MAC
address of the first received frame.
Note
From the moment that the device adopts another MAC address (whether manually or
automatically), the device no longer responds to queries of the Primary Setup Tool when
the query is received over the WLAN interface. Queries of the PST over the Ethernet
interface continue to be replied to.
Adopt Own MAC
If IP-based frames need to be sent to a device connected downstream from the client, the
default setting "Own" can be retained. The client registers with the MAC address of its
Ethernet adapter. The IP packets are broken down according to an internal table and
forwarded to the connected devices (IP mapping).
Maximum possible number of MAC nodes downstream from the client: 8
Layer 2 Tunnel
With a "Layer 2 Tunnel", the client provides information about the devices downstream from
it when it registers with an access point. This makes it possible to enter the MAC addresses
of these devices in the learning table of the access point. The access point can forward
MAC-based frames for the devices downstream from the client to the appropriate client.
In much the same way as with WDS, a separate port is created for the L2T client over which
the Ethernet frames are sent without changing the destination MAC address.
Maximum possible number of MAC nodes downstream from the client: 8
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
30
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Technical basics
3.3 iPCF / iPCF-MC
3.3
iPCF / iPCF-MC
The wireless range of an IWLAN system can be expanded by using multiple access points. If
a client moves from the area covered by one access point to the area covered by another
access point, the wireless link is maintained after a short interruption (roaming).
In an industrial environment, there are applications that require a deterministic response
when there are large numbers of nodes and when roaming to another cell require handover
times of less than 100 milliseconds.
● iPCF (industrial Point Coordination Function)
iPCF ensures that the entire data traffic of a cell is ordered, controlled by the access
point. Even with large numbers of nodes, collisions can also be avoided. iPCF also allows
fast cell changes.
You configure iPCF in "iFeatures > iPCF (Page 263)".
● iPCF-MC (industrial Point Coordination Function - Management Channel)
iPCF-MC was developed to make the advantages of iPCF available to fully mobile nodes
that communicate without being dependent on RCoax cable or directional antennas. With
iPCF-MC, the client also searches for potentially suitable access points when it receives
iPCF queries from the access point and the existing connection to an access point is
working problem-free. This means that if a change to a different access point is
necessary, this is achieved extremely quickly. In contrast to iPCF, the handover times for
iPCF-MC are not dependent on the number of wireless channels being used.
You configure iPCF-MC in "iFeatures > iPCF-MC (Page 266)".
iPCF / iPCF-MC - how it works
The access point checks all nodes in the wireless cell cyclically. At the same time, the scan
includes the downlink traffic for this node. In the reply, the node sends the uplink data. The
access point scans a new node at least every 5 ms.
The scan of a node is seen by all other nodes in the cell. This allows a client to detect the
quality of the wireless link to the access point even when it is not communicating with the
access point itself. If the client does not receive any frames from the access point for a
certain time, it starts to search for a new access point.
In iPCF mode, both the search for a new access point and the registration with this access
point have been optimized in terms of time. Handover times significantly below 50 ms are
achieved.
Stable PNIO communication is only possible when a WLAN client is in a cell with more than
60 % (-65 dBm) signal strength at all times. This can be checked by activating and
deactivating the various wireless cells.
This does not mean that the client needs to change when there is a signal strength < 60 %
(< -65 dBm). Make sure that access points are available with adequate signal strength.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
31
Technical basics
3.3 iPCF / iPCF-MC
①
②
③
④
⑤
Wireless cell of access point 1
Wireless cell of access point 2
Wireless cell of access point 3
Wireless cell of access point 4
Plant
Figure 3-1
Configuration example of iPCF-MC
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
32
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Technical basics
3.4 iREF
Restrictions
● iPCF and iPCF-MC are developments of Siemens AG and function only with nodes on
which iPCF / iPCF-MC is implemented.
● With an access point with several WLAN interfaces, it is possible to use both iPCF as well
as standard WLAN at the same time.
● Access points with a WLAN interface cannot take part in the iPCF-MC procedures, iPCF
is, however, possible.
Requirements for iPCF-MC
iPCF-MC uses the two wireless interface of the access point in different ways: One interface
works as the management interface and sends a beacon every five milliseconds. The other
interface transfers the user data.
The following requirements must be met before you can use iPCF-MC:
● Only devices with two WLAN interfaces can be used as access points
● The data interface (WLAN1) and management interface (WLAN2) must be operated in
the same frequency band and must match in terms of their wireless coverage. iPCF-MC
will not work if the two wireless interfaces are equipped with directional antennas that
cover different areas.
● The management interfaces of all access points to which a client can change must use
the same channel. A client scans only this one channel to find accessible access points.
● Transmission based on IEEE 802.11h (DFS) cannot be used for the management
interface. 802.11h (DFS) is possible for the data interface.
● A client must support this feature on its WLAN interface.
3.4
iREF
How it works
If an access point has several activated antennas, the transmit power is distributed equally
on these antennas. The transmit power is subject to country-specific legal restrictions. The
maximum permitted power depends on the gain of the connected antennas. If the connected
antennas have different gains, the maximum antenna gain effectively restricts the permitted
transmit power.
iREF (industrial Range Extension Function) ensures that the data traffic from the access
point to each individual client is handled via the most suitable antenna. Which antenna is
most suitable is determined by the access point based on the RSSI values of received
packets.
Taking into account antenna gain and possible cable losses, packets are only sent via the
antennas with which the maximum signal strength at the client end can be expected.
During this time the other antennas are inactive and the legally permitted transmit power is
available for the selected antenna. The inactive antennas do not restrict the permitted
transmit power.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
33
Technical basics
3.4 iREF
In particular in applications in which MIMO cannot be used or brings no advantage, this
allows data to be transmitted at the highest possible data transmission rate.
You configure iREF in "iFeatures > iREF"
Requirement
● To be able to use iREF, the device must have at least 2 activated antennas.
Restrictions
● A maximum data rate of only up to 150 Mbps (MCS 0 - 7 or 1 x spatial stream) is possible
● iREF cannot be used along with other iFeatures (for example iPCF or iPCF-MC)
Advantages
● Due to the directional data transmission and dynamic deactivation of antennas that do not
radiate in the direction of the particular client, interference can be reduced.
● The signal strength is improved because the active antenna always has the maximum
permitted transmit power available.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
34
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Technical basics
3.5 AeroScout
3.5
AeroScout
AeroScout tags
SCALANCE W devices support tags of the AeroScout company. Tags are battery-operated
RFID sensors that send their data cyclically as multicast frames.
Among other things, AeroScout tags have the following features:
● Ambient temperature
If a tag is fitted to a device or material, it is possible to monitor whether a selected
ambient temperature is being maintained.
● Motion
Here, a tag can also supply information indicating whether it is in motion or stationary.
The areas of material flow and material handling engineering represent possible
applications for this function.
● Button
Regardless of the frames sent cyclically, a user can also send a message by pressing a
button.
● LED
This provides information on the operating status of the tag.
Note
For more detailed information, please refer to the AeroScout documentation
(www.aeroscout.com).
How it works
The tag sends its data as AeroScout frames. The tags and the access points communicate
in the 2.4 GHz band.
If the WLAN interface of the access point receives the AeroScout frame, this is converted
into a UDP datagram. The device forwards the UDP datagram along with the information
about the signal strength (RSSI) to a PC. The AeroScout Engine runs on the PC and
evaluates the received information.
Note
It is not advisable to use PNIO communication and AeroScout together on one wireless
interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
35
Technical basics
3.6 NAT/NAPT
Accuracy of localization
To achieve optimum precision in the localization of AeroScout Tags,
● we recommend the use of antennas with omnidirectional characteristics
● if the signals should be received by at least three access points.
3.6
NAT/NAPT
What is NAT?
With Network Address Translation (NAT), the IP address in a data packet is replaced by
another. NAT is normally used on a gateway between a private LAN and an external network
with globally valid IP addresses. A local IP address of the internal LAN is changed to an
external global IP address by a NAT device at the gateway.
To translate the internal into the global IP address, the NAT device maintains a translation
list. The address assignment is automatic. You configure the address assignment in "Layer 3
> NAT > Basic (Page 245)".
What is NAPT?
In "Network Address Port Translation" (NAPT) or "Port Address Translation" (PAT), several
internal source IP addresses are translated into the same external source IP address. To
identify the individual source nodes, the port of the source device is also stored in the
translation list of the NAT gateway and translated for the external address.
If several local clients send a query to the same external destination IP address over the
NAT gateway, the gateway enters its own external source IP address in the header of these
forwarded frames. Since the forwarded frames have the same global source IP address, the
NAT gateway assigns the frames to the clients using different port number.
Note
NAT/NAPT is possible only on layer 3 of the ISO/OSI reference model. To use the NAT
function, the networks must use the IP protocol.
When using the ISO protocol that operates at layer 2, it is not possible to use NAT.
If a client from the global network wants to use a service in the internal network, the
translation list for the static address assignment needs to be configured. You configure the
translation list for NAPT in "Layer 3 > NAT > NAPT (Page 246)".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
36
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Technical basics
3.7 SNMP
3.7
SNMP
Introduction
With the aid of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), you monitor and control
network elements from a central station, for example routers or switches. SNMP controls the
communication between the monitored devices and the monitoring station.
Tasks of SNMP:
● Monitoring of network components
● Remote control and remote parameter assignment of network components
● Error detection and error notification
In versions v1 and v2c, SNMP has no security mechanisms. Each user in the network can
access data and also change parameter assignments using suitable software.
For the simple control of access rights without security aspects, community strings are used.
The community string is transferred along with the query. If the community string is correct,
the SNMP agent responds and sends the requested data. If the community string is not
correct, the SNMP agent discards the query. Define different community strings for read and
write permissions. The community strings are transferred in plain text.
Standard values of the community strings:
● public
has only read permissions
● private
has read and write permissions
Note
Because the SNMP community strings are used for access protection, do not use the
standard values "public" or "private". Change these values following the initial
commissioning.
Further simple protection mechanisms at the device level:
● Allowed Host
The IP addresses of the monitoring systems are known to the monitored system.
● Read Only
If you assign "Read Only" to a monitored device, monitoring stations can only read out
data but cannot modify it.
SNMP data packets are not encrypted and can easily be read by others.
The central station is also known as the management station. An SNMP agent is installed on
the devices to be monitored with which the management station exchanges data.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
37
Technical basics
3.8 Spanning Tree
The management station sends data packets of the following type:
● GET
Request for a data record from the agent
● GETNEXT
Calls up the next data record.
● GETBULK (available as of SNMPv2)
Requests multiple data records at one time, for example several rows of a table.
● SET
Contains parameter assignment data for the relevant device.
The SNMP agent sends data packets of the following type:
● RESPONSE
The agent returns the data requested by the manager.
● TRAP
If a certain event occurs, the SNMP agent itself sends traps.
SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 and SNMPv3 use UDP (User Datagram Protocol). The data is
described in a Management Information Base (MIB).
SNMPv3
Compared with the previous versions SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. SNMPv3 introduces an
extensive security concept.
SNMPv3 supports:
● Fully encrypted user authentication
● Encryption of the entire data traffic
● Access control of the MIB objects at the user/group level
3.8
Spanning Tree
Avoiding loops
The Spanning Tree algorithm detects redundant physical network structures and prevents
the formation of loops by disabling redundant paths. It evaluates the distance and
performance of a connection or bases the decisions on settings made by the user. Data is
then exchanged only over the remaining connection paths.
If the preferred data path fails, the Spanning Tree algorithm then searches for the most
efficient path possible with the remaining nodes.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
38
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Technical basics
3.8 Spanning Tree
Root bridge and bridge priority
The identification of the most efficient connection is always related to the root bridge, a
network component that can be considered as a root element of a tree-like network
structure. With the "Bridge Priority" parameter, you can influence the selection of the root
bridge. The computer with the lowest value set for this parameter automatically becomes the
root bridge. If two computers have the same priority value, the computer with the lower MAC
address becomes the root bridge.
Response to changes in the network topology
If nodes are added to a network or drop out of the network, this may affect the optimum path
selection for data packets. To be able to respond to such changes, the root bridge sends
configuration messages (BPDUs) at regular intervals. You can set the interval between two
configuration messages with the "Hello Time" parameter.
Keeping configuration information up to date
With the "Max Age" parameter, you set the maximum age of configuration information. If a
bridge has information that is older than the time set in Max Age, it discards the message
and initiates recalculation of the paths.
New configuration data is not used immediately by a bridge but only after the period
specified in the "Forward Delay" parameter. This ensures that operation is started with the
new topology only after all the bridges have the required information.
3.8.1
RSTP, MSTP, CIST
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
One disadvantage of STP is that if there is a disruption or a device fails, the network needs
to reconfigure itself: The devices start to negotiate new paths only when the interruption
occurs. This can take up to 30 seconds. Fur this reason, STP was expanded to create the
"Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol" (RSTP, IEEE 802.1w). This differs from STP essentially in
that the devices are already collecting information about alternative routes during normal
operation and do not need to gather this information after a disruption has occurred. This
means that the reconfiguration time for an RSTP controlled network can be reduced to a few
seconds.
This is achieved by using the following functions:
● Edge ports (end node port)
Edge ports are ports connected to an end device.
A port that is defined as an edge port is activated immediately after connection
establishment. If a spanning tree BPDU is received at an edge port, the port loses its role
as edge port and it takes part in (R)STP again. If no further BPDU is received after a
certain time has elapsed (3 x hello time), the port returns to the edge port status.
● Point-to-point (direct communication between two neighboring devices)
By directly linking the devices, a status change (reconfiguration of the ports) can be made
without any delays.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
39
Technical basics
3.8 Spanning Tree
● Alternate port (substitute for the root port)
A substitute for the root port is configured. If the connection to the root bridge is lost, the
device can establish a connection over the alternate port without any delay due to
reconfiguration.
● Reaction to events
Rapid spanning tree reacts to events, for example an aborted connection, without delay.
There is no waiting for timers as in spanning tree.
● Counter for the maximum bridge hops
The number of bridge hops a package is allowed to make before it automatically
becomes invalid.
In principle, therefore with rapid spanning tree, alternatives for many parameters are
preconfigured and certain properties of the network structure taken into account to reduce
the reconfiguration time.
Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP)
The Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol (MSTP) is a further development of the Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol. Among other things, it provides the option of operating several
RSTP instances within different VLANs or VLAN groups and, for example, making paths
available within the individual VLANs that the single Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol would
globally block.
Note
Default setting
HTTP is enabled as default on the device.
Common and internal Spanning Tree (CIST)
CIST identifies the internal instance used by the switch that is comparable in principle with
an internal RSTP instance.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
40
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
4
Assignment of an IP address
4.1
Structure of an IP address
Address classes
IP address range
Max. number of networks
1.x.x.x through 126.x.x.x
128.0.x.x through 191.255.x.x
192.0.0.x through 223.255.255.x
Max. number of
hosts/network
Class
CIDR
126
16777214
A
/8
16383
65534
B
/16
2097151
254
C
/24
224.0.0.0 - 239.255.255.255
Multicast applications
D
240.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255
Reserved for future applications
E
An IP address consists of 4 bytes. Each byte is represented in decimal, with a dot separating
it from the previous one. This results in the following structure, where XXX stands for a
number between 0 and 255:
XXX.XXX.XXX.XXX
The IP address is made up of two parts, the network ID and the host ID. This allows different
subnets to be created. Depending on the bytes of the IP address used as the network ID and
those used for the host ID, the IP address can be assigned to a specific address class.
Subnet mask
The bits of the host ID can be used to create subnets. The leading bits represent the address
of the subnet and the remaining bits the address of the host in the subnet.
A subnet is defined by the subnet mask. The structure of the subnet mask corresponds to
that of an IP address. If a "1" is used at a bit position in the subnet mask, the bit belongs to
the corresponding position in the IP address of the subnet address, otherwise to the address
of the computer.
Example of a class B network:
The standard subnet address for class B networks is 255.255.0.0; in other words, the last
two bytes are available for defining a subnet. If 16 subnets must be defined, the third byte of
the subnet address must be set to 11110000 (binary notation). In this case, this results in the
subnet mask 255.255.240.0.
To find out whether two IP addresses belong to the same subnet, the two IP addresses and
the subnet mask are ANDed bit by bit. If both logic operations have the save result, both IP
addresses belong to the same subnet, for example, 141.120.246.210 and 141.120.252.108.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
41
Assignment of an IP address
4.2 Initial assignment of an IP address
Outside the local area network, the distinction between network ID and host ID is of no
significance, in this case packets are delivered based on the entire IP address.
Note
In the bit representation of the subnet mask, the "ones" must be set left-justified; in other
words, there must be no "zeros" between the "ones".
4.2
Initial assignment of an IP address
Configuration options
An initial IP address for a SCALANCE W700 cannot be assigned using Web Based
Management (WBM) or the Command Line Interface (CLI) over Telnet because these
configuration tools require that an IP address already exists.
The following options are available to assign an IP address to an unconfigured device
currently without an IP address:
● DHCP (default)
● Primary Setup Tool
● STEP 7
● NCM PC
Note
When the product ships and following "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", DHCP is
enabled. If a DHCP server is available in the local area network, and this responds to the
DHCP request of a SCALANCE W700, the IP address, subnet mask and gateway are
assigned automatically when the device first starts up. " Restore Memory Defaults and
Restart" does not delete an IP address assigned either by DHCP or by the user.
4.3
Address assignment with DHCP
Properties of DHCP
DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) is a method for automatic assignment of IP
addresses. It has the following characteristics:
● DHCP can be used both when starting up a device and during ongoing operation.
● The assigned IP address remains valid only for a limited time known as the lease time.
Once this period has elapsed, the client must either request a new IP address or extend
the lease time of the existing IP address.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
42
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Assignment of an IP address
4.4 Address assignment with the Primary Setup Tool
● There is normally no fixed address assignment; in other words, when a client requests an
IP address again, it normally receives a different address from the previous address. It is
possible to configure the DHCP server so that the DHCP client always receives the same
fixed address in response to its request. The parameter with which the DHCP client is
identified for the fixed address assignment is set on the DHCP client. The address can be
assigned via the MAC address, the DHCP client ID or the system name. You configure
the parameter in "System > DHCP Client (Page 150)".
● The following DHCP options are supported:
– DHCP option 66: Assignment of a dynamic TFTP server name
– DHCP option 67: Assignment of a dynamic boot file name
– DHCP option 82: Assignment of IP addresses depending on the switch port or the
VLAN ID
Note
DHCP uses a mechanism with which the IP address is assigned for only a short time
(lease time). If the device does not reach the DHCP server with a new request on expiry
of the lease time, the assigned IP address, the subnet mask and the gateway continue to
be used.
The device therefore remains accessible under the last assigned IP address even without
a DHCP server. This is not the standard behavior of office devices but is necessary for
problem-free operation of the plant.
4.4
Address assignment with the Primary Setup Tool
Introduction
The PST (Primary Setup Tool) is capable of assigning such an address to unconfigured
devices that do not yet have an IP address.
Requirement
The devices can be reached via Ethernet.
Note
For more detailed information, refer to the Primary Setup Tool configuration manual.
You will find the PST at Siemens Industry Automation and Drives Service & Support on the
Internet under entry ID 19440762. The URL for this entry is:
http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19440762
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/19440762)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
43
Assignment of an IP address
4.5 Address assignment with STEP 7
4.5
Address assignment with STEP 7
In STEP 7, you can configure the topology, the device name and the IP address; in other
words, an IP address is specified for the MAC address of the IWLAN device. If you connect
the unconfigured IWLAN device to the controller, the controller assigns the configured device
name and the IP address to the IWLAN device automatically.
STEP 7 V5.x and earlier
For further information on the assignment of the IP address using STEP 7 V5.x and earlier,
refer to the documentation "Configuring Hardware and Communication Connections STEP
7", in the section "Steps for Configuring a PROFINET IO System".
STEP 7 as of V13
For further information on assigning the IP address using STEP 7 as of V13, refer to the
online help "Information system", section "Addressing PROFINET devices".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
44
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.1
5
Web Based Management
How it works
The device has an integrated HTTP server for Web Based Management (WBM). If a device
is addressed with a Web browser, it returns HTML pages to the client PC depending on the
user input.
The user enters the configuration data in the HTML pages sent by the device. The device
evaluates this information and generates reply pages dynamically.
The advantage of this method is that only a Web browser is required on the client.
Note
Secure connection
WBM also allows you to establish a secure connection via HTTPS.
Use HTTPS for protected data transmission. If you want to access WBM only via a secure
connection, under "System > Configuration" enable the option "HTTPS Server only".
Requirements
WBM display
● The device has an IP address
● There is a connection between the device and the client device. With the Windows ping
command, you can check whether or not a connection exists.
● Access via HTTPS is enabled.
● JavaScript is activated in the Web browser.
● The Web browser must not be set so that it reloads the page from the server each time
the page is accessed. The updating of the dynamic content of the page is ensured by
other mechanisms. In the Internet Explorer, you can make the appropriate setting in the
"Options > Internet Options > General" menu in the section "Browsing history" with the
"Settings" button. Under "Check for newer versions of stored pages:", select
"Automatically".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
45
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.2 Login
● If a firewall is used, the relevant ports must be opened.
– For access using HTTP: Port 80
– For access using HTTPS: Port 443
● The display of the WBM was tested with the following desktop Web browsers:
– MS IE 10
Note
Compatibility view
In Microsoft Internet Explorer, disable the compatibility view to ensure correct display
and to allow problem-free configuration using WBM.
– Mozilla Firefox ESR31
Display of the WBM on mobile devices
● The display of the WBM was tested with the following Web browsers for mobile devices:
– Safari as of V7 on iOS as of V7.1.1 (iPad mini Model A1432)
– Chrome as of V32 on Android as of version 4.4.3 (Nexus 7C Asus),
● Minimum resolution: 960 x 640 pixels
Note
Display of the WBM and working with it on mobile devices
The display on the WBM pages and how you work with them on mobile devices may differ
compared with the same pages on desktop devices. Some pages also have an optimized
display for mobile devices.
5.2
Login
Establishing a connection to a device
Follow the steps below to establish a connection to a device using an Internet browser:
1. There is a connection between the device and the client PC. With the ping command, you
can check whether or not a connection exists.
2. In the address box of the Internet browser, enter the IP address or the URL of the device.
If there is a problem-free connection to the device, the login page of Web Based
Management (WBM)is displayed.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
46
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.2 Login
Logging on using the Internet browser
Selecting the language of the WBM
1. From the drop-down list at the top right, select the language version of the WBM pages.
2. Click the "Go" button to change to the selected language.
Note
Available languages
in this version, only English is available. Other languages will follow in a later version.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
47
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.2 Login
Login with HTTP
There are two ways in which you can log in via HTTP. You either use the login option in the
center of the browser window or the login option in the upper left area of the browser
window.
The following steps apply when logging in whichever of the above options you choose:
1. Enter the following in the "Name" input box:
– "admin": With this user type, you can change the settings of the device (read and write
access to the configuration data).
– "user": With this user type, you cannot change any of the settings of the device (read
access to the configuration data).
2. Enter your password in the "Password" input box.
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults und Restart",
enter the standard password in the "Password" input box.
– "admin": standard password "admin"
– "user": standard password "user"
3. Click the "Login" button or confirm your entry with "Enter".
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart",
you will be prompted to change the password. The new password must be at least 6
characters long. You need to repeat the password as confirmation. The password entries
must match. Click the "Set Values" to complete the action and activate the new
password.
Once you have logged in successfully, the start page appears.
Login with HTTPS
Web Based Management also allows you to connect to the device over the secure
connection of the HTTPS protocol. Follow these steps:
1. Click on the link "Switch to secure HTTP" on the login page or enter "https://" and the IP
address of the device in the address box of the Internet browser.
2. Confirm the displayed certificate warning.
The login page of Web Based Management appears.
3. Enter the following in the "Name" input box:
– "admin": With this user type, you can change the settings of the device (read and write
access to the configuration data).
– "user": With this user type, you cannot change any of the settings of the device (read
access to the configuration data).
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
48
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
4. Enter your password in the "Password" input box.
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults und Restart",
enter the standard password in the "Password" input box.
– "admin": standard password "admin"
– "user": standard password "user"
5. Click the "Login" button or confirm your entry with "Enter".
When you log in for the first time or following a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart",
you will be prompted to change the password. The new password must be at least 6
characters long. You need to repeat the password as confirmation. The password entries
must match. Click the "Set Values" to complete the action and activate the new
password.
Once you have logged in successfully, the start page appears.
5.3
"Wizard" menu
5.3.1
Basic Wizard
Introduction
With the Basic Wizard, menus guide you through the configuration of the most important
parameters.
On the Basic Wizard pages, you can only configure the parameters important for the basic
functionality. You make further settings when you have finished with the Basic Wizard.
Requirement
● The device is in the status it was when it was shipped and can be reached via the
Ethernet interface.
● You have assigned an IP address to the device. For more detailed information, refer to
the section "Assignment of an IP address (Page 41)".
● You are logged on in WBM as the "admin" user. For more detailed information, refer to
the section "Login (Page 46)".
Starting the Basic Wizard
Click on "Wizard > Basic Wizard" in the navigation area to start the Basic Wizard.
If you log on the first time or log on after a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", the Basic
wizard is always started automatically after you have changed the default password.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
49
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Buttons you require often
The WBM pages of the Basic Wizard contain the following buttons:
Button
Description
Goes to the next page
Goes back to the previous page
The Basic Wizard is closed without adopting the settings.
Saves the configuration and exits the Wizard.
Navigation within the pages of the Basic Wizard is possible only with the "Previous" and
"Next" buttons.
5.3.1.1
System Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you specify the mode of the device. After changing the mode, a
message is displayed.
If you confirm the message with "OK", the device restarts with the factory-set configuration
settings. Log on again and start the Basic Wizard to continue the configuration of the device
for the selected mode.
Note
Because only access points can work in client mode as well, the mode can only be selected
for these devices.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
50
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Description
The Basic Wizard page contains the following boxes:
● "Restore Memory Defaults and Restart" button
If you click this button, the factory configuration settings are restored with the exception of
the parameters below followed by a restart.
– IP address
– Subnet mask
– IP address of the default gateway
– DHCP client ID
– DHCP
– System name
– System location
– System contact
– User names and passwords
– Mode of the device
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
51
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
After restarting the device, you will need to log on again and start the Basic wizard again to
configure the device.
● "Device Mode" drop-down list
Select the mode of the device. This selection is available only for access points.
The following operating modes are possible:
– AP: Access point mode
– Client: Client mode
5.3.1.2
Country Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you configure the country and the system name.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
52
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Description
The Basic Wizard page contains the following boxes
● "Country Code" drop-down list
From this drop-down list, you select the country in which the device will be deployed. You
do not need to know the data for the specific country, the channel division and output
power are set by the device according to the country you select.
Note
Locale setting
The correct country setting is mandatory for operation complying with the approvals.
Selecting a country different from the country of use can lead to legal prosecution.
● "System Name" input box
You can enter the name of the device. If you configure this box, this configuration is
adopted and displayed in the selection area. A maximum of 255 characters are possible.
The system name is also displayed in the CLI input prompt. The number of characters in
the CLI input prompt is limited. The system name is truncated after 16 characters.
5.3.1.3
IP Address Settings
Introduction
One of the basic steps in configuration of a device is setting the IP address. The IP address
identifies a device in the network uniquely.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
53
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Description
The Basic Wizard page contains the following boxes
● "DHCP Client" check box
Specify how the IP address will be assigned. There are two methods of assigning IP
addresses.
– Enabled
The device obtains a dynamic IP address from a DHCP Server.
– Disabled
You enter the IP settings in the "IP Address" and "Subnet Mask" input boxes.
● "IP Address" input box
Enter an IP address that is unique within your network.
● "Subnet Mask" input box
Enter the subnet mask of the device.
● "Default Gateway" input box
Enter the IP address of the default gateway so that the device can communicate with
devices in other subnets, for example diagnostics stations, e-mail server.
5.3.1.4
Management Interfaces
System configuration
On this Basic Wizard page, you specify the services with which the device can be accessed.
With some services, there are further configuration pages on which more detailed settings
can be made. Configure these services after completing the Basic Wizard.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
54
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Telnet Server" check box
Enable or disable the "Telnet Server" service for unencrypted access to the CLI.
● "SSH Server" check box
Enable or disable the "SSH Server" service for encrypted access to the CLI.
● "HTTPS Server only" check box
Enable or disable access using HTTPS.
● "DCP Server" drop-down list
Specify whether or not the device can be accessed with DCP (Discovery and
Configuration Protocol):
– "-" (disabled)
DCP is disabled. Device parameters can neither be read nor modified.
– Read/Write
With DCP, device parameters can be both read and modified.
– Read-Only
With DCP, device parameters can be read but cannot be modified.
● "SNMP" drop-down list:
Select the protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (SNMP disabled)
Access to device parameters via SNMP is not possible.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
Access to device parameters is possible with SNMP versions 1, 2c or 3. You can
configure other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
– SNMPv3
Access to device parameters is possible with SNMP version 3. You can configure
other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
● "SNMPv1/v2 Read-Only" check box
Enable or disable write access to SNMP variables with SNMPv1/v2c.
● "SINEMA Configuration Interface" check box
If the SINEMA configuration interface is enabled, you can download configurations to the
device via the TIA Portal.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
55
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.5
Antenna Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you configure the settings for the external antenna.
Description
This table contains the following columns:
● Connector
Shows the name of the relevant antenna connector.
● Antenna Type
Select the type of external antenna connected to the device. If the type of your antenna is
not available, select the entry "User defined".
Connectors that are not used must have a 50 Ω terminating resistor fitted. Select the
entry "Not used (connect 50 Ohms Termination)".
Note
50 Ω terminating resistor
The WLAN interface has up to two antenna connectors. One antenna must be always be
connected as soon as the associated WLAN Interface is turned on. If no antenna is
connected, the relevant interface must also be disabled for RX and TX. Otherwise, there
may be transmission disruptions. Antenna connectors that are not used must have a 50 Ω
terminating resistor fitted.
● Antenna Gain [dBi]
If you select the "User defined" entry for the "Antenna Type", enter the antenna gain
manually in the "dBi" unit.
– Antenna Gain 2.4 GHz [dBi]
Here, enter the antenna gain the antenna has in the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
– Antenna Gain 5 GHz [dBi]
Here, enter the antenna gain the antenna has in the 5 GHz frequency band.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
56
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
● Cable Length [m]
Enter the length of the flexible antenna connecting cable in meters between the device
and the external antenna.
● Additional Attenuation [dB]
Here, specify the additional attenuation caused, for example, by an additional splitter.
Note
If you use other WLAN interfaces, make sure that you have adequate channel spacing.
5.3.1.6
Radio Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you specify the configuration for the WLAN interfaces.
Description
This table contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Enabled
Enable or disable the WLAN interface. The WLAN interfaces are disabled when the
device is supplied.
● Radio Mode
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.
● Frequency Band
Specify the frequency band. In client mode, dual-frequency operation is also possible.
Note
Configuring WLAN interfaces of the W786-2IA RJ-45 for different frequency bands
If both WLAN interfaces are configured for the same frequency band on this device, there
may be mutual influence or interference. This applies in particular when there is a high
data throughput.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
57
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
● WLAN Mode
Select the required transmission standard for the configured frequency band.
– WLAN Mode 2.4 GHz
Specify the transmission standard for the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
– WLAN Mode 5 GHz
Specify the transmission standard for the 5 GHz frequency band. The selection
depends on the country setting.
● DFS (802.11h)
– Enabled
If the access point discovers a disruption on the current channel, for example due to a
primary user, it automatically switches to an alternative channel. You specify the
alternative channel on the "AP Settings" Basic Wizard page. DFS is also required for
the use of certain wireless channels. This can only be enabled in the 5 GHz band.
– Disabled
The DFS function is not used.
● Outdoor Mode
– Enabled
In outdoor mode, the selection of country-dependent channels and the transmit power
for operation are extended for outdoor use.
– Disabled
The device is being operated in indoor mode. In indoor mode, the selection of countrydependent channels and the transmit power for operation in a building are restricted.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
58
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
● max. Tx Power
Specify the transmit power of the device. It may be necessary to reduce the transmit
power depending on the antennas being used to avoid exceeding the maximum legal
transmit power. Reducing the transmit power effectively reduces cell size
Note
The maximum possible transmit power varies depending on the channel and data rate.
For more detailed information on transmit power, refer to the documentation
"Characteristics radio interface".
Note
If both interfaces of access points with two WLAN interfaces are operated in the same
frequency range, this may cause wireless interference on one or both interfaces at a
transmit power higher than 15 dBm.
● Tx Power Check
Indicates whether the settings that have been made will violate the permitted transmit
power restrictions of the selected country. The following parameters influence this
calculation:
max. Tx Power, Antenna Gain, Additional Attenuation.
The following displays can appear:
– Allowed
The channels can be used with the current settings.
– Not Allowed (Some Channels)
Among the channels, there are some on which the current transmit power exceeds the
maximum permitted transmit power.
– Not Allowed (All Channels)
No permitted operation is possible. The transmit power is too high.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
59
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.7
Access Point Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you specify the configuration for the access point.
Note
This page is available only in access point mode.
Description of the displayed boxes
Table 1 contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Channel
Specify the main channel. If you want the access point to search for a free channel itself,
use "Auto". If you want to use a fixed channel, select the required channel from the dropdown list.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
60
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
● Alternative DFS Channel
If you have enabled the "DFS" function on the Basic Wizard page "Radio Settings",
specify the alternative channel here. If you want the access point to search for a free
channel itself, use "Auto". If you want to use a fixed channel, select the required channel
from the drop-down list.
● HT Channel Width [MHz]
You can specify the channel bandwidth with the IEEE 802.11n transmission standard.
The following settings are possible.
– 20
Channel bandwidth 20 MHz
– 40 up
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
above it are used.
– 40 down
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
below it are used.
Table 2 contains the following columns:
● Port
Shows the first VAP interface per WLAN interface.
● SSID
Enter the SSID. The length of the character string for SSID it is 1 to 32 characters.
The ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used for the SSID.
After completing the Basic Wizard, you can define further SSIDs with "Interfaces > WLAN
> AP".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
61
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.8
Client Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you specify the configuration for clients, for example the
assignment of the MAC address.
Note
This page is only available in client mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
62
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Description
Table 1 contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● MAC Mode
Specify how the MAC address is assigned to the client. The following are possible:
– Automatic
The client automatically adopts the source MAC address of the first frame that it
receives over the Ethernet interface.
– Manual
If you select "Manual", enter the MAC address in the "MAC Address" column.
– Own
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
– Layer 2 Tunnel
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
The network is also informed of the MAC addresses connected to the Ethernet
interface of the client. Up to eight MAC addresses can be used.
● MAC Address
Enter the MAC address of the client. The input box can only be edited if you have set
"Manual" for the "MAC Mode".
● Any SSID
– Enabled
In client mode, the device attempts to connect to the network with the best
transmission quality and that has suitable security settings.
– Disabled
The client attempts to connect to the network from the SSID list that has the best
transmission quality.
Table 2 contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● SSID
Enter the SSID of the access point with which the client connects. In the Basic Wizard,
you can only specify one SSID. After completing the Basic Wizard, you can define further
SSIDs with "Interfaces > WLAN > Client".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
63
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.9
Client Allowed Channel Settings
Introduction
For communication, a specific channel within a frequency band is used. On this page, you
can either set this channel specifically or configure so that the channel is selected
automatically.
Note
This page is only available in client mode.
Description
Table 1 contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Use Allowed Channels only
If you enable the option, you restrict the selection of channels via which the client is
allowed to establish the connection.
In the following tables, you define the channels on which the client searches for an AP.
The tables are divided up according to frequency bands.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
64
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
If the option is disabled, the channels available based on the settings (country code,
antennas, transmit power etc.) are used.
Above the tables for the frequency bands, you will find the following check box:
● Select / Deselect all
– Enabled
If you enable the check box, all channels are selected.
– Disabled
If you deselect the check box, only the first valid channel of the frequency band
remains enabled.
The tables of the frequency bands have the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Radio Mode
Shows the mode of the device.
● Channel number
To specify the valid channels for the required frequency band, select the appropriate
check box for the channel number.
The table displays the permitted channels of the country. Only the valid channels can be
enabled. Invalid channels are grayed out and cannot be enabled.
Note
To specify the channels, the setting "Use Allowed Channels only" must be enabled.
5.3.1.10
Security Settings
Introduction
To make the network secure, authentication and encryption are used. You specify the
security levels with the type of authentication and the encryption procedure.
Note
If "AUTO" or "802.11n" or "802.11 n only is set for WLAN Mode "AUTO", only the
authentication types Open System, WPA2 (RADIUS), WPA2-PSK can be set.
Use WPA2/AES, to prevent misuse of a password WPA2 (RADIUS) / WPA2-PSK with AES
provides the greatest security. You will find further information on security in the
configuration manual under "Instructions for secure network design".
The security settings on both devices must match to allow a client to communicate with an
access point.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
65
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
Description
This table contains the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the interface to which the settings relate.
● Authentication Type
Select the type of authentication.
Note
IEEE 802.11n devices
With devices according to the IEEE 802.11n standard, only WPA2 encryption is possible.
– Open System
Without authentication
– WPA-PSK
WPA authentication with WPA key. Enter the WPA key in "WPA(2) Pass phrase".
– WPA (RADIUS)
WPA authentication with RADIUS server. You configure the access data on the next
Basic Wizard page.
– WPA2-PSK
WPA2 authentication with WPA2 key. Enter the WPA2 key in "WPA(2) Pass phrase".
– WPA2 (RADIUS)
WPA2 authentication with RADIUS server. You configure the access data on the next
Basic Wizard page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
66
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
● Cipher
Select the encryption method.
– AUTO
AES or TKIP is used depending on the capability of the other station.
– TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
A symmetrical encryption method with the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4). In contrast
to the weak WEP encryption, TKIP uses changing keys derived from a main key. TKIP
can also recognize corrupted data frames.
– AES
(Advanced Encryption Standard)
Strong symmetrical block encryption method based on the Rijndael algorithm that
further improves the functions of TKIP.
● WPA(2) Pass Phrase
Enter a WPA(2) key. The key can be 8 to 63 ASCII characters or exactly 64 hexadecimal
characters long. This WPA(2) key must be known on both the client and the access point
and is entered by the user at both ends.
Note
The WPA(2) key can be 8 to 63 ASCII characters or exactly 64 hexadecimal characters
long. It should be selected so that is complex for example consisting of random numbers,
letters (upper-/lowercase), have few repetitions and special characters. Do not use known
names, words or terms that could be guessed. If a device is lost or if the key becomes
known, change the key on all devices to maintain security.
● WPA(2) Pass Phrase Confirmation
Confirm the entered WPA(2) key.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
67
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.11
Dot1x Supplicant Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you configure the user name and the password with which the
client will be logged on with the RADIUS server.
If you require additional authentication methods, you can configure them after completing the
Basic Wizard with "Security > WLAN > Client Radius Supplicant".
Note
This page is only available in client mode.
Description
Table 1 contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Dot1x User Name
Enter the user name with which the client will log on with the RADIUS server.
● Dot1x User Password
Enter the password for the user name selected above. The client is logged on with the
RADIUS server using this combination.
For password assignment, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
● Dot1x User Password Confirmation
Enter the password again in this input box.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
68
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.12
Dot1x RADIUS Server Settings
Introduction
On this Basic Wizard page, you configure the settings for the primary RADIUS Server.
After completing the Basic Wizard, you can configure a backup server and other settings, for
example the number of logon attempts with "Security > WLAN > AP Radius Authenticator".
Note
This page is available only in access point mode.
Description
This table contains the following columns:
● Server Role
Shows the role of the server.
● Server IP Address
Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server. The use of the computer name (name
resolution using DNS) instead of the IP address is not supported.
● Server Port
Enter the port of the RADIUS server.
● Shared Secret
Enter the password of the RADIUS server.
● Shared Secret Confirmation
Enter the password again in this input box.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
69
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.3 "Wizard" menu
5.3.1.13
Summary of Settings
Introduction
The settings are summarized on this page. The content of the page depends on the set
parameters and the mode of the device.
Check the settings before you exit the Basic Wizard with the "Set Values" button. If settings
are incorrect, go back using the "Previous" button and change the settings to the required
ones.
Set Values
Click the "Set Values" button to exit the Basic Wizard. The WLAN settings are adopted.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
70
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4
"Information" menu
5.4.1
Start Page
View of the Start page
When you enter the IP address of the device, the start page is displayed after a successful
login. You cannot configure anything on this page.
General layout of the WBM pages
The following areas are generally available on every WBM page:
● Selection area (1): Top area
● Display area (2): Top area
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
71
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Navigation area (3): Left-hand area
● Content area (4): Middle area
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
72
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Selection area (1)
The following is available in the selection area:
● Logo of Siemens AG
● Display of: "System Location/System Name".
– "System Location" contains the location of the device.
With the settings when the device ships, the IP address of the Ethernet interface is
displayed.
– "System Name" is the device name. With the settings when the device ships, the
device type is displayed.
You can change the content of this display with "System > General > Device.
● Drop-down list for language selection
● System time and date
You can change the content of this display with "System > System Time.
Display area (2)
In the left-hand part of the display area, the full title of the currently selected menu item is
always displayed.
● Mode
Shows whether the device is an access point or a client.
● Printer
When you click this button, a popup window opens with a view of the page content
optimized for the printer.
● Help
When you click this button, the help page of the currently selected menu item is opened
in a new browser window.
● LED simulation
Each component of a device has one or more LEDs that provide information on the
operating state of the device. Depending on its location, direct access to the device may
not always be possible. Web Based Management therefore displays simulated LEDs.
Unoccupied slots or unused connectors are displayed as a grayed-out LED. The meaning
of the LED displays is described in the compact operating instructions.
If you click this button, you open the window for the LED simulation. You can show this
window during a change of menu and move it as necessary. To close the LED simulation,
click the close button in the LED simulation window.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
73
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Update on
/ Update off
WBM pages with overview lists can also have the additional "Update" button.
With this button, you can enable or disable updating of the content area. If updating is
enabled, the display is updated every 2 seconds. To disable the update, click "On".
Instead of "On", "Off" is displayed. As default, updating is always enabled on the WBM
page.
Navigation area (3)
In the navigation area, you have various menus available. Click the individual menus to
display the submenus. The submenus contain pages on which information is available or
with which you can create configurations. These pages are always displayed in the content
area.
Content area (4)
In the navigation area, click a menu to display the pages of the WBM in the content area.
The following is displayed below the picture of the device:
● PNIO Name of Station: PROFINET IO device name
● System Name: System name of the device
● Device Type: The type of the device
● PNIO AR Status: PROFINET IO application relation status
● Power Line1, Power Line2, Power over Ethernet: Status of the power supplies line 1 and
line 2 or power over Ethernet. The power line 2 and power over Ethernet are only
displayed if they are supported by the hardware. You will find further information on this in
the compact operating instructions.
● PLUG configuration: Status of the configuration data on the PLUG
● PLUG license: Status of license on the PLUG
● Fault Status: Error status
Buttons you require often
The pages of the WBM contain the following standard buttons:
● Refresh the display with "Refresh"
Web Based Management pages that display current parameters have a "Refresh" button
at the lower edge of the page. Click this button to request up-to-date information from the
device for the current page.
Note
If you click the "Refresh" button, before you have transferred your configuration changes
to the device using the "Set Values" button, your changes will be deleted and the
previous configuration will be loaded from the device and displayed here.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
74
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Save entries with "Set Values"
Pages in which you can make configuration settings have a "Set Values" button at the
lower edge. The button only becomes active if you change at least one value on the
page. Click this button to save the configuration data you have entered on the device.
Once you have saved, the button becomes inactive again.
Note
Changing configuration data is possible only with the "admin" login.
● Create entries with "Create"
Pages in which you can make new entries have a "Create" button at the lower edge. Click
this button to create a new entry.
● Delete entries with "Delete"
Pages in which you can delete entries have a "Delete" button at the lower edge. Click this
button to delete the previously selected entries from the device memory. Deleting also
results in an update of the page in the WBM.
● Page down with "Next"
The number of data records that can be displayed on a page is limited. Click the "Next"
button to page down through the data records.
● Page up with "Prev"
The number of data records that can be displayed on a page is limited. Click the "Prev"
button to page up through the data records.
Logout
You can log out from any WBM page by clicking the "Logout" link.
5.4.2
Versions
Versions of hardware and software
This page shows the versions of the hardware and software of the device. You cannot
configure anything on this page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
75
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Hardware
– Basic Device
Shows the basic device.
● Name
Shows the name of the device or module.
● Revision
Shows the hardware version of the device. For the wireless card, only one version is then
displayed if the WLAN interface is enabled.
● Order ID
Shows the order number of the device or described module.
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Software
– Firmware
Shows the current firmware version. If a new firmware file was downloaded and the
device has not yet restarted, the firmware version of the downloaded firmware file is
displayed here. After the next restart, the downloaded firmware is activated and used.
– Bootloader
Shows the version of the boot software stored on the device.
– Firmware_Running
Shows the firmware version currently being used on the device.
● Description
Shows the short description of the software.
● Version
Shows the version number of the software version.
● Date
Shows the date on which the software version was created.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
76
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.3
I&M
Identification and maintenance data
This page contains information about device-specific vendor and maintenance data such as
the order number, serial number, version number etc. You cannot configure anything on this
page.
Description of the displayed values
The table has the following rows:
● Manufacturer ID
Shows the manufacturer ID.
● Order ID
Shows the order number.
● Serial Number
Shows the serial number.
● Hardware Revision
Shows the hardware version.
● Software Revision
Shows the software version.
● Revision Counter
As of firmware version 4.0, the value "0" is always shown here regardless of the version
change.
● Revision Date
Revision date: Date and time of the last revision
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
77
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Function Tag
Shows the function tag (plant designation) of the device. The plant designation (HID) is
created during configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.
● Location Tag
Shows the location tag (location identifier) of the device. The location identifier (LID) is
created during configuration of the device with HW Config of STEP 7.
5.4.4
ARP Table
Assignment of MAC address and IP address
With the Address Resolution Protocol (ARP), there is a unique assignment of MAC address
to IP address. This assignment is kept by each network node in its own separate ARP table.
The WBM page shows the ARP table of the device.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the interface via which the row entry was learnt.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the target device.
● IP Address
Shows the IP address of the target device.
● Media Type
Shows the type of connection.
– Dynamic
The device recognized the address data automatically.
– Static
The addresses were entered as static addresses.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
78
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.5
Log Tables
5.4.5.1
Events
Logging events
The device allows you to log occurring events, some of which you can specify on the page of
the System > Events menu. This, for example, allows you to record when an authentication
attempt failed or when the connection status of a port has changed.
The content of the events log table is retained even when the device is turned off.
You cannot configure anything on this page.
Description
● Severity Filters
You can filter the entries in the table according to severity. To display all the entries,
enable or disable all parameters.
– 6 - Info
Informative
– 4 - Warning
Warnings
– 2 - Critical
Critical
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
79
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
The table has the following columns:
● Restart
Counts the number of restarts since you last reset to factory settings and shows the
device restart after which the corresponding event occurred.
● System Up Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described
event occurred.
● System Time
Shows the date and time when the described event occurred.
● Severity
Shows the severity of the message.
● Log Message
Displays a brief description of the event that has occurred. You will find the list of possible
messages in Appendix D of the configuration manual.
If the system time is set, the time is also displayed at which the event occurred.
Description of the button
"Clear" button
Click this button to delete the content of the event log file. The display is also cleared. The
restart counter is only reset after you have restored the device to the factory settings and
restarted the device.
Note
The number of entries in this table is restricted to 400. When this number is reached, the
oldest entries are overwritten. The table remains permanently in memory.
"Show all" button
Click this button to display all the entries on the WBM page. Note that displaying all
messages can take some time. The button only becomes active if there is more than one
page.
"Next" button
Click this button to go to the next page. The button only becomes active if there is more than
one page.
"Prev" button
Click this button to go to the previous page. The button only becomes active if there is more
than one page.
Drop-down list for page change
From the drop-down list, select the page you want to go to. This list only becomes active if
there is more than one page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
80
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.5.2
WLAN Authentication Log
Logging authentication attempts
This page shows a table with information on successful or failed authentication attempts.
You cannot configure anything on this page.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Restart
Counts the number of restarts since you last reset to factory settings and shows the
device restart after which the corresponding event occurred.
● System Up Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described
fault occurred.
● System Time
Shows the time at which the described error occurred.
● Log Message
Displays a brief description of the event that has occurred. You will find the list of possible
messages in Appendix D of the configuration manual.
If the system time is set, the time is also displayed at which the event occurred.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
81
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description of the button
"Clear" button
Click this button to delete the content of the log file. The display is also cleared. The restart
counter is only reset after you have restored the device to the factory settings and restarted
the device.
Note
The number of entries in this table is restricted to 400. When this number is reached, the
oldest entries are overwritten. The table remains permanently in memory.
"Show all" button
Click this button to display all the entries on the WBM page. Note that displaying all
messages can take some time.
"Next" button
Click this button to go to the next page.
"Prev" button
Click this button to go to the previous page.
Drop-down list for page change
From the drop-down list, select the page you want to go to.
5.4.6
Faults
Error status
This page displays any errors that occur. Errors of the "Cold/Warm Start" event can be
deleted following confirmation.
If there are no more unanswered error/fault messages, the fault LED goes off.
The time calculation always begins after the last system start. When the system is restarted,
a new entry with the type of restart is created in the fault memory.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
82
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● No. of Signaled Faults
Indicates how often the fault LED lit up and not how many faults occurred.
● "Reset Counters" button
The number is reset with this button.
The table contains the following columns:
● Fault Time
Shows the time the device has been running since the last restart when the described
fault occurred.
● Fault Description
Display of the fault status for the device.
● Clear Fault State
To delete errors of the "Cold/Warm Start" event, click the Clear Fault State" button.
5.4.7
Redundancy
Introduction
The page shows the current information about the Spanning Tree and the settings of the root
bridge.
If Spanning Tree is turned off, only the basic information about this device is displayed.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
83
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
If Spanning Tree is turned on, the information about the status of the instance selected in the
"Instance ID" drop-down list is displayed and the information about the configured ports is
shown in the table. The information shown depends on the Spanning Tree mode.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Spanning Tree Mode
Shows the set mode. You specify the mode in "Layer 2 > Configuration" and in "Layer 2 >
MSTP > General".
The following values are possible:
– '-'
– STP
– RSTP
– MSTP
● Instance ID
Shows the number of the instance. The parameter depends on the configured mode.
● Bridge Priority / Root Priority
Which device becomes the root bridge is decided based on the bridge priority. The bridge
with the highest priority (in other words, with the lowest value for this parameter) becomes
the root bridge. If several devices in a network have the same priority, the device whose
MAC address has the lowest numeric value will become the root bridge. Both
parameters, bridge priority and MAC address together form the bridge identifier. Since
the root bridge manages all path changes, it should be located as centrally as possible
due to the delay of the frames. The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of
4096 with a range of values from 0 to 32768.
● Bridge Addresse / Root Addresse
The bridge address shows the MAC address of the device and the root address shows
the MAC address of the root bridge.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
84
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.
● Bridge Status
Shows the status of the bridge, e.g. whether or not the device is the root bridge.
● Regional Root Priority (only available with MSTP)
For a description, see Bridge Priority / Root Priority
● Regional Root Address (only available with MSTP)
Shows the MAC address of the device.
● Regional Root Cost (only available with MSTP)
Shows the path costs from the regional root bridge to the root bridge.
The table contains the following boxes:
● Port
Shows the port via which the device communicates.
● Role
shows the status of the port. The following values are possible:
– Disabled
The port was removed manually from the spanning tree and will no longer be taken
into account by the spanning tree.
– Designated
The ports leading away from the root bridge.
– Alternate
The port with an alternative route to a network segment
– Backup
If a switch has several ports to the same network segment, the "poorer" Port becomes
the backup port.
– Root
The port that provides the best route to the root bridge.
– Master
This port points to a root bridge located outside the MST region.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
85
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● State
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed. The parameter
depends on the configured protocol. The following statuses are possible:
– Discarding
The port receives BPDU frames. Other incoming or outgoing frames are discarded.
– Listening
The port receives and sends BPDU frames. The port is involved in the spanning tree
algorithm. Other outgoing and incoming frames are discarded.
– Learning
The port actively learns the topology; in other words, the node addresses. Other
outgoing and incoming frames are discarded.
– Forwarding
Following the reconfiguration time, the port is active in the network. The port receives
and sends data frames.
● Oper. Version
Describes the type of spanning tree in which the port operates
● Priority
If the path calculated by the spanning tree is possible over several ports of a device, the
port with the highest priority (in other words the lowest value for this parameter) is
selected. A value between 0 and 240 can be entered for the priority in steps of 16. If you
enter a value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is automatically adapted. The
default is 128.
● Path Cost
This parameter is used to calculate the path that will be selected. The path with the
lowest value is selected as the route. If several ports of a device have the same value,
the port with the lowest port number is selected.
If the value in the "Cost Calc" box is "0", the automatically calculated value is displayed.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc" box is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher
the achievable transmission speed is, the lower the value of the path costs.
Typical values for path costs with rapid spanning tree:
– 10,000 Mbps = 2,000
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
86
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Edge Type
Shows the type of the connection. The following values are possible:
– Edge Port
An edge port is connected to this port.
– No Edge Port
There is a spanning tree or rapid spanning tree device at this port.
● P.t.P. Type
shows the type of the point-to-point link. The following values are possible:
– P.t.P.
With half duplex, a point-to-point link is assumed.
– Shared Media
With a full duplex connection, a point-to-point link is not assumed.
Note
Point-to-point link means a direct connection between two devices. A shared media
connection is, for example, a connection to a hub.
5.4.8
Ethernet Statistics
5.4.8.1
Interface statistics
Interface statistics
The page shows the statistics from the interface table of the Management Information Base
(MIB).
Figure 5-1
Interface statistics
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
87
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Displayed values
The table has the following columns:
● In Octet
Shows the number of received bytes.
● Out Octet
Shows the number of sent bytes.
● In Unicast
Shows the number of received unicast frames.
● In Non-Unicast
Shows the number of received frames that are not of the type unicast.
● Out Unicast
Shows the number of sent unicast frames.
● Out Non-Unicast
Shows the number of sent frames that are not of the type unicast.
● In Errors
Shows the number of all possible RX errors, refer to the "Packet Error" tab.
5.4.8.2
Packet Size
Frames sorted by length
This page displays how many frames of which size were received at each port. You cannot
configure anything on this page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
88
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the available ports.
● Frame lengths
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of incoming
frames according to their frame length.
The following frame lengths are distinguished:
– 64 bytes
– 65 - 127 bytes
– 128 - 255 bytes
– 256 - 511 bytes
– 512 - 1023 bytes
– 1024 - max.
Description of the button
"Reset Counter" button
Click "Reset Counter" to reset all counters. The counters are also reset by a restart on the
device.
5.4.8.3
Packet Type
Received frames sorted by type
This page displays how many frames of the type "Unicast", "Multicast" and "Broadcast" were
received at each port. You cannot configure anything on this page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
89
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the available ports.
● Unicast/Multicast /Broadcast
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of the incoming
frames according to their frame type "Unicast", "Multicast" and "Broadcast"
Description of the button
"Reset Counter" button
Click "Reset Counter" to reset all counters. The counters are reset by a restart.
5.4.8.4
Packet Error
Bad received frames
This page shows how many bad frames were received per port. You cannot configure
anything on this page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
90
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the available ports.
● Error types
The other columns after the port number contain the absolute numbers of the incoming
frames according to their error type.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following error types:
– CRC
Packets whose content does not match the CRC checksum.
– Undersize
Packets with a length less than 64 bytes.
– Oversize
Packets discarded because they were too long.
– Fragments
Packets with a length less than 64 bytes and a bad CRC checksum.
– Jabbers
VLAN-tagged packets with an incorrect CRC checksum that were discarded because
they were too long.
– Collisions
Detected collisions.
Description of the button
"Reset Counter" button
Click "Reset Counter" to reset all counters. The counters are also reset by a restart on the
device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
91
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.9
Learning Table
Address filtering
This WBM page shows the current content of the learning table. This table lists the source
addresses of unicast address frames.
Description
This table contains the following columns:
● VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID of the node.
Note
This column appears in the table only if a VLAN is configured.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the node.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
92
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Status
Shows the status of each address entry:
– Learnt
The specified address was learned by receiving a frame from this node and will be
deleted when the aging time expires if no further packets are received from this node.
– Invalid
These values are not evaluated.
● Port
Shows the port over which the node with the specified address can be reached. Frames
received by the device whose destination address matches this address will be forwarded
to this port.
Button "Show all"
Click this button to display all the entries on the WBM page. Note that displaying all
messages can take some time.
"Next" button
Click this button to go to the next page.
"Prev" button
Click this button to go to the previous page.
Drop-down list for page change
From the drop-down list, select the page you want to go to.
5.4.10
DHCP Server
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
This page shows whether IPv4 addresses were assigned to the devices by the DHCP
server.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
93
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
● IP Address
Shows the IPv4 address assigned to the device.
● Pool ID
Shows the number of the IPv4 address band.
● HW Type
Shows that the DHCP server identifies the devices in the network based on the MAC
address.
● HW Address
Shows the MAC address of the DHCP client.
● Allocation Method
Show whether the IPv4 address was assigned statically or dynamically. You configure the
static entries in "System > DHCP > Static Leases".
● Binding State
Shows the status of the assignment.
– assigned
The assignment is used.
– not assigned
The assignment is not used.
– probing
The assignment is being checked.
– unknown
The status of the assignment is unknown.
● Expire Time
Shows how long the assigned IPv4 address is still valid. Once this period has elapsed,
the device must either request a new IPv4 address or extend the lease time of the
existing IPv4 address.
5.4.11
WLAN
5.4.11.1
Overview AP
Overview of the configuration
This page shows these settings/properties of the WLAN or the WLAN interface.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
94
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● WLAN mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard
"802.11h" is not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard
"802.11a".
● Configured Channel
Shows the configured channel. If "Auto" is displayed, the access point searches for a free
channel itself.
● Alternative DFS Channel
If the DFS function is enabled, the configured alternative channel of the access point is
displayed.
If "Auto" is displayed, the access point searches for an alternative channel itself.
If the DFS function is activated and the access point browses for primary users for 60
seconds before starting communication with the selected channel, the text "scanning ..."
is displayed instead of the channel.
● Operative Channel
Shows the channel of the access point via which the access point communicates.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
95
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● HT Channel Width [MHz]
Shows the channel bandwidth.
– 20
Channel bandwidth 20 MHz
– 40 up
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
above it are used.
– 40 down
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
below it are used.
Note
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz and frequency band 2.4 GHz
If the access point detects another access point on the configured channel or on
neighboring channels, the access point changes the channel bandwidth from 40 MHz
to 20 MHz. If you set a "free" channel on the access point, the access point uses the
channel bandwidth 40 MHz.
● iFeatures
Shows which iFeatures are used.
– iFeatures are not used.
– iPCF
iPCF is enabled
● Status
Shows the status of the WLAN interface.
– enabled
The WLAN interface is enabled.
– disabled
The WLAN interface is disabled.
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Port
Shows the port of the virtual access point.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the virtual access point.
● SSID
Shows the SSID.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
96
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used,
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" is displayed for both authentication methods.
● Status
Shows the status of the WLAN interface.
– enabled
The WLAN interface is enabled.
– disabled
The WLAN interface is disabled.
5.4.11.2
Client List
Logged-on clients
The page the clients logged on with the access point as well as additional information, for
example status, signal strength, MAC address.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
Description
● Associated stations
Shows the number of clients logged on to the access point.
The table has the following columns:
● AID (Associated ID)
Shows the connection ID of the client. If the client connects to the access point via the
VAP interface, the client is assigned a connection ID. The connection ID is unique within
a VAP interface. If two clients log on at different VAP interfaces, both clients can receive
the same ID.
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Port
Shows the VAP interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
97
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Type
Shows the client type, for example "Sta" stands for IEEE 802.11 standard client.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the client.
● System Name
Shows the system name of the client if the client communicates this to the access point.
Not all clients support this parameter.
● Channel
Shows the channel over which the client communicates with the access point.
● Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the connected client in bBm.
● Signal Strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the connected client as a percentage.
● Age [s]
Shows the time that has elapsed since the last client activity.
● Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used,
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" is displayed for both authentication methods.
● WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard
"802.11h" is not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard
"802.11a".
● Max. Data Rate [Mbps]
Shows the maximum data transmission speed in megabits per second.
● State
Shows the current status of the connection, for example Connected means that the client
is connected to the AP and is ready to communicate with the AP.
5.4.11.3
WDS List
Communication between access points
In normal operation, the access point is used as an interface to a network and communicates
with clients. There are, however, situations in which several access points need to
communicate with each other, for example to extend wireless coverage or to set up a
wireless backbone. This mode is possible with WDS (Wireless Distributed System).
As default, the list is updated every 2 seconds. To disable the update, click "On". Instead of
"On", "Off" is displayed. As default, updating is always enabled on the WBM page.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
98
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
This page shows information about the WDS connections of the access point.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Port
Shows the port.
● BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the WDS partner.
● WDS ID
Shows the name of the WDS partner.
● Channel
Shows the channel over which the access point communicates with the WDS partner.
● Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the connected access point in bBm.
● Signal Strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the connected access point as a percentage.
● Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used,
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" is displayed for both authentication methods.
● Max. Data Rate [Mbps]
Shows the maximum data transmission speed for the relevant WDS partner.
● State
Shows the current status of the WDS connection.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
99
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.11.4
Overlap AP
Overlapping channels
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
For optimum data throughput, it is important that the set wireless channel is not used by
other access points. In the 2.4 GHz band (802.11b or 802.11g), there is overlapping of the
channels so that an access point occupies not only the set channel but also the two or three
adjacent channels. You should therefore make sure that there is adequate channel spacing
to neighboring access points.
This page shows all access points that are visible on the set or adjacent channels (at 2.4
GHz). If entries exist here, the maximum data throughput of the access point and the
availability of the communication link to the access point is potentially impaired.
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Aging Time [min]
Specify the life time of the entries in the list. If an access point is inactive for longer than
the set time, it is removed from the list.
Note
Changing the aging time
The aging time is a WLAN setting. For this reason, if a change is made, the WLAN
connection is briefly interrupted to accept the new value.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
100
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Type
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.
● SSID
Shows the SSID of the access point.
● BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the access point.
● System Name
displays the system name of the device. The entry depends on the access point. Not all
access points support this parameter.
● Channel
Shows the channel over which the client communicates with the access point.
● Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the client in dBm.
● Signal Strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the client as a percentage.
● Age [s]
Shows the time that has elapsed since the last access point activity.
● Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used,
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" is displayed for both authentication methods.
● WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard
"802.11h" is not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard
"802.11a" or "802.11n".
5.4.11.5
Overview Client
Overview of the configuration
Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.
The page shows an overview of the existing clients and their configuration.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
101
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● WLAN mode
Shows the transmission standard.
● MAC Mode
Shows how the MAC address is assigned to the interface.
– Automatic
The client automatically adopts the source MAC address of the first frame that it
receives over the Ethernet interface.
– Manual
The address was entered manually.
– Own
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
– Layer 2 Tunnel
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
The network is also informed of the MAC addresses connected to the Ethernet
interface of the client. Up to 4 MAC addresses can be used.
● MAC Address
Displays the MAC address of the WLAN interface.
● Operative Channel
Shows the channel of the access point with which the client is connected.
● HT Channel Width [MHz]
Shows the channel bandwidth.
– 20
Channel bandwidth 20 MHz.
– 40 up
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
above it are used.
– 40 down
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
below it are used.
Note
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz and frequency band 2.4 GHz
If the access point detects another access point on the configured channel or on
neighboring channels, the access point changes the channel bandwidth from 40 MHz
to 20 MHz. If you set a "free" channel on the access point, the access point uses the
channel bandwidth 40 MHz.
● Connected BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the access point with which the client is connected.
● Connected SSID
Shows the SSID of the access point with which the client is connected.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
102
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used,
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" is displayed for both authentication methods.
● iFeatures
Shows which iFeatures are used.
– iFeatures are not used.
– iPCF
iPCF is enabled.
● Max. Data Rate [Mbps]
Shows the maximum transmission rate of the interface.
● Status
Shows the status of the WLAN interface.
– enabled
The WLAN interface is enabled.
– disabled
The WLAN interface is disabled.
5.4.11.6
Available AP
Available access points
Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.
This page shows all the access points visible to the client. The list also includes the access
points to which the client cannot connect due to its configuration.
Note
Display when iPCF mode is activated
If the iPCF mode is active with a SCALANCE W700, the display is different. Since the client
does not run a background scan in this case, only the access point with which the client is
currently connected is displayed.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
103
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the WLAN interface visible to the access point.
● SSID
Shows the SSID of the access point.
● BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the access point.
● System Name
displays the system name of access point. The entry depends on the access point. Not
all access points support this parameter.
● Channel
Shows the channel on which the access point transmits or communicates.
● Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the access point in dBm.
● Signal Strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the access point as a percentage.
● Type
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.
● Security
Shows which authentication method is used.
If the authentication method "Open System + Encryption" or "Shared Key" is used,
"Encrypted (WEP/AES)" is displayed for both authentication methods.
● WLAN Mode
Shows the transmission standard. If DFS is activated, the transmission standard
"802.11h" is not shown additionally but only the configured transmission standard
"802.11a" or "802.11n".
● State
Shows the status of the access point, for example whether or not the access point is
available.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
104
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.11.7
IP Mapping Table
WLAN access for several devices via a client
Note
This page is only available for clients or access points in client mode.
You can make WLAN access available for several devices with one client if you use IP
mapping. This means that you do not need to equip every device with its own WLAN client.
This is possible only if the connected devices are addressed only by IP frames.
Communication at MAC address level (ISO/OSI layer 2) can
● be established with one component whose MAC address is configured on the client,
● be established with a maximum of eight components if the "Layer 2 Tunnel" function is
selected.
The "Layer 2 Tunnel" setting meets the requirements of industrial applications in which MAC
address-based communication takes place with several devices downstream from the client.
Clients with this setting cannot connect to standard Wi-Fi devices and access points with
firmware V3.0 or older.
The client maintains a table with the assignment of MAC address and IP address to be able
to send incoming IP frames to the correct MAC address. The "IP Mapping Table" menu
command displays this table.
Note
IP mapping table
If "Layer 2 Tunnel" is configured for a client, the IP mapping table is not displayed.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
105
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
● MAC Address
The MAC address of the device located downstream from the WLAN client from the
perspective of the access point.
● IP Address
The IP address managed for this device by the WLAN client.
● Type
There are two options for the type:
– system
The information relates to the WLAN client itself.
– learned
The information relates to a device downstream from the WLAN client.
MAC Mode
IP frames in the direction from the client to the access point always have the MAC address
of the WLAN interface as the source MAC address. As a result, the ARP tables at the access
point end always contain only the MAC address of the WLAN interface of the clients. If there
are several devices downstream from the client, the "Auto find Adopt MAC" function should
not be enabled. In this case, the MAC address would be assigned indiscriminately to the first
device that signals over Ethernet. If there is only IP communication between the access point
and the client, the default setting "Adopt own MAC" can be retained. If you also want MAC
address-based frames to be sent by devices downstream from the client, select the settings
"Adopt MAC manually", "Auto find 'Adopt MAC'" or "Layer 2 Tunnel".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
106
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.12
WLAN Statistics
5.4.12.1
Errors
The WBM page show how many bad frames were received or sent per WLAN interface. If an
increased number of errors occurs, you should check the settings for the WLAN interface(s),
the setup of the devices and the connection quality.
Description
The Tx Errors table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the WLAN interface to which the entries apply.
● Error types
The other columns after the WLAN interface contain the absolute numbers of the frames
sent according to their error type.
The columns of the table distinguish the following error types:
– Transmission Errors
Shows the number of bad frames that were sent.
– Dropped Frames
Shows the number of frames that were discarded.
Despite all the retries, the frame could not be successfully sent.
The frame has not yet been sent and the recipient has logged off in the meantime.
– Retry Count
Shows the number of frames sent successfully that required one or more retries.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
107
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
The Rx Errors table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the WLAN interface to which the entries apply.
● Error types
The other columns after the WLAN interface contain the absolute numbers of the frames
received according to their error type.
The columns of the table distinguish the following error types:
– Received Errors
Shows the number of bad frames that were received.
– Duplicate Frames
Shows the number of frames that were received twice.
– Decryption Errors
Shows the number of bad encrypted frames.
– FCS Errors
Shows the number of frames in which the checksum was incorrect.
"Reset Counter" button
Click this button to reset the counters.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
108
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.12.2
Management Sent
The WBM page shows how many frames in response to logging on or logging off were
counted per VAP interface.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
109
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the VAP interface to which the entries apply.
● Frame
– Management Frames
Shows the number of management frames
– Association Request
Shows the number of requesting association frames relevant for a logon.
– Association Responses
Shows the number of responding association frames relevant for a logon.
– Disassociation Request
Shows the number of requesting disassociation frames relevant for a logoff.
– Authentication Request
Shows the number of requesting authentication frames relevant for a logon.
– Authentication Responses
Shows the number of responding authentication frames relevant for a logon.
– Deauthentication Request
Shows the number of deauthentication frames relevant for a logoff.
"Reset Counter" button
Click this button to reset the counters.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
110
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.12.3
Management Received
The WBM page shows how many frames in response to logging on or logging off were
counted per VAP interface.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
111
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the VAP interface to which the entries apply.
● Frame
– Management Frames
Shows the number of management frames
– Association Request
Shows the number of requesting association frames relevant for a logon.
– Association Responses
Shows the number of responding association frames relevant for a logon.
– Disassociation Request
Shows the number of requesting disassociation frames relevant for a logoff.
– Authentication Request
Shows the number of requesting authentication frames relevant for a logon.
– Authentication Responses
Shows the number of responding authentication frames relevant for a logon.
– Deauthentication Request
Shows the number of deauthentication frames relevant for a logoff.
"Reset Counter" button
Click this button to reset the counters.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
112
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.12.4
Data Sent
The WBM page shows how many frames were sent per VAP interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
113
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the VAP interface to which the entries apply.
● Frame types
The other columns after the VAP interface contain the absolute numbers of the sent
frames according to the frame types.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following frame types:
– Data Frames
Shows the number of sent data frames.
– Multicast/Broadcast Frames
Shows the number of sent multicast and broadcast frames.
– Unicast Frames
Shows the number of sent unicast frames.
– Average Rate
Shows average data rate of the last data frames sent.
"Reset Counter" button
Click this button to reset the counters.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
114
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
5.4.12.5
Data Received
The WBM page shows how many frames were received per VAP interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
115
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the VAP interface to which the entries apply.
● Frame types
The other columns after the VAP interface contain the absolute numbers of the received
frames according to the frame types.
In the columns of the table, a distinction is made according to the following frame types:
– Data Frames
Number of received data frames.
– Multicast/Broadcast Frames
Shows the number of received multicast and broadcast frames.
– Unicast Frames
Shows the number of received unicast frames.
– Average Rate
Shows average data rate of the last data frames received.
"Reset Counter" button
Click this button to reset the counters.
5.4.13
WLAN iFeatures
5.4.13.1
iREF Client List
The WBM page shows the antenna connector via which the clients logged on to the access
point communicate. Other information such as the signal strength and the MAC address of
the WLAN interface is also shown.
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUG:
– Access point: W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
116
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The page contains the following box:
● Associated stations
Shows the number of clients logged on to the access point
The table has the following columns:
● AID (Associated ID)
Shows the connection ID of the client. If the client connects to the access point via the
VAP interface, the client is assigned a connection ID. The connection ID is unique within
a VAP interface. If two clients log on at different VAP interfaces, both clients can receive
the same ID.
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Port
Shows the VAP interface.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the client.
● System Name
Shows the system name of the client if the client communicates this to the access point.
Not all clients support this parameter.
● Tx Chain
Shows the antenna connector over which the client communicates with the access point.
● Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the connected client in bBm.
● Signal Strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the connected client as a percentage.
● Age [s]
Shows the age of the listed client.
5.4.13.2
iREF WDS List
The WBM page shows the access points logged on to the access point via a WDS link. This
page shows information such as the antenna used and the signal strength of the WLAN
interface.
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUG:
– Access point: W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
117
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The page contains the following box:
● Connected WDS Partners
Shows the number of access points logged on to the access point
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Port
Shows the WDS interface.
● BSSID
Shows the MAC address of the WDS partner.
● WDS ID
Shows the name of the WDS partner.
● Tx Chain
Shows the antenna connector over which the two access points communicate with each
other.
● Signal Strength [dBm]
Shows the signal strength of the connected access point in bBm.
● Signal Strength [%]
Shows the signal strength of the connected access point as a percentage.
5.4.13.3
AeroScout
This page shows information on forwarding AeroScout frames.
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUG:
Access point: W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
118
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Note
The AeroScout function cannot be combined with other iFeatures (iPCF, iPCF-MC,, iREF).
AeroScout can only be used in the 2.4 GHz band according to IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
and IEEE 802.11n-only.
For more detailed information, please refer to the documentation of the AeroScout company
(www.aeroscout.com).
Description
● Tag Information forwarding
In the management program that evaluates the AeroScout frames, you can specify
whether or not an IWLAN device will forward frames. Here, you can see which setting
was made in the management program.
Note
With a suitable configuration, the SCALANCE W700 forwards AeroScout frames but does
not process or evaluate them itself. This is done only in the "AeroScout System Manager"
program.
● AeroScout State
This indicates whether AeroScout is enabled or disabled.
● Engine port
The IWLAN device expects UDP packets from the management program at port 1144.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
119
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
● Response IP
The IP address of the computer on which the management program for evaluation of the
AeroScout frames is running.
● Multicast address
The tag sends frames as multicast. This multicast address is configured in the
management program and displayed here.
● Acknowledgements sent
The number of acknowledgments sent by the IWLAN device to the management program
as a result of cyclic queries or manual configuration changes in the management program
(UDP packets).
● Messages dropped
The number of frames not forwarded. If, for example, an AeroScout tag is configured so
that it sends on channel 1, the IWLAN device does not forward a frame received on
channel 6.
5.4.14
Security
5.4.14.1
Inter AP blocking
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page is enabled with the following KEY-PLUGs:
– W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
– W700 Security (MLFB 6GK5907-0PA00)
The WBM page shows a list of the devices with which the clients are allowed to
communicate.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
120
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.4 "Information" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces to which the settings relate.
● Port
Shows the VAP interface to which the settings relate.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the device with which the client may communicate.
● IP Address
Shows the IP address of the device with which the client may communicate.
● Resolver IP Address
Shows the IP address with which the permitted IP address is resolved.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
121
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5
"System" menu
5.5.1
System Configuration
System configuration
The WBM page contains the configuration overview of the access options of the device.
Specify the services that access the device. With some services, there are further
configuration pages on which more detailed settings can be made.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Telnet Server" check box
Enable or disable the "Telnet Server" service for unencrypted access to the CLI.
● "SSH Server" check box
Enable or disable the "SSH Server" service for encrypted access to the CLI.
● "HTTPS Server only" check box
Enable or disable access using HTTPS.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
122
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● "DNS Client" check box
Enable or disable the DNS client. You can configure other settings in "System > DNS
Client".
● "SMTP Client" check box
Enable or disable the SMTP client. You can configure other settings in "System > SMTP
Client".
● "Syslog Client" check box
Enable or disable the Syslog client. You can configure other settings in "System > Syslog
Client".
● "DCP Server" drop-down list
Specify whether or not the device can be accessed with DCP (Discovery and
Configuration Protocol):
– "-" (disabled)
DCP is disabled. Device parameters can neither be read nor modified.
– Read/Write
With DCP, device parameters can be both read and modified.
– Read-Only
With DCP, device parameters can be read but cannot be modified.
● "Time"drop-down list
Select the setting from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– Manual
The system time is set manually. You can configure other settings in "System > Time
> Manual Setting".
– SIMATIC Time
The system time is set using a SIMATIC time transmitter. You can configure other
settings in "System > System Time > SIMATIC Time Client".
– SNTP Client
The system time is set via an SNTP server. You can configure other settings in
"System > System Time > SNTP Client".
– NTP Client
The system time is set via an NTP server. You can configure other settings in "System
> System Time > NTP Client".
● "SNMP" drop-down list:
Select the protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (SNMP disabled)
Access to device parameters via SNMP is not possible.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
Access to device parameters is possible with SNMP versions 1, 2c or 3. You can
configure other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
– SNMPv3
Access to device parameters is possible only with SNMP version 3. You can configure
other settings in "System > SNMP > General".
● "SNMPv1/v2 Read-Only" check box
Enable or disable write access to SNMP variables with SNMPv1/v2c.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
123
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● "SNMPv1 Traps" check box
Enable or disable the sending of traps (alarm frames). You can configure other settings in
"System > SNMP > Traps".
● "DHCP Client" check box
Enable or disable the DHCP client. You can configure other settings in "System > DHCP
Client".
● "SINEMA Configuration Interface" check box
If the SINEMA configuration interface is enabled, you can download configurations to the
device via the TIA Portal.
● "Configuration Mode" drop-down list:
Select the mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
– Automatic Save
Automatic save mode. Approximately 1 minute after the last parameter change or
when you restart the device, the configuration is automatically saved.
– Trial
Trial mode. In Trial mode, although changes are adopted, they are not saved in the
configuration file (startup configuration).
To save changes in the configuration file, use the "Write Startup Config" button. The
"Write Startup Config" button is displayed when you set trial mode. The message
"Trial Mode Active – Press "Write Startup Config" button to make your settings
persistent." is also displayed in the display area as soon as there are unsaved
changes. This message can be seen on every WBM page until the changes made
have either been saved or the device has been restarted.
Procedure
1. To use the required function, select the corresponding check box.
2. Select the options you require from the drop-down lists.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
124
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.2
General
5.5.2.1
Device
General device information
This page contains the general device information.
The boxes "Current System Time", "System Up Time" and "Device Type" cannot be
changed.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Current System Time
Shows the current system time. The system time is either set by the user or by a time-ofday frame: either SINEC H1 time-of-day frame, NTP or SNTP. (readonly)
● System Up Time
Shows the running time of the device since the last restart. (readonly)
● Device Type
Shows the type of the device. (readonly)
● "System Name" input box
You can enter the name of the device. The entered name is displayed in the selection
area. A maximum of 255 characters are possible.
The system name is also displayed in the CLI input prompt. The number of characters in
the CLI input prompt is limited. The system name is truncated after 16 characters.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
125
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● "System Contact" input box
You can enter the name of a contact person responsible for managing the device. A
maximum of 255 characters are possible.
● "System Location" input box
You can enter the installation location of the device. The entered installation location is
displayed in the selection area. A maximum of 255 characters are possible.
Note
The ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used in the input boxes.
At the start and end of the boxes "System Name", "System Contact" and "System
Location", the characters "<", ">" and "space" are not permitted.
Procedure
1. Enter the contact person responsible for the device in the "System Contact" input box.
2. Enter the identifier for the location at which the device is installed in the "System
Location" input box.
3. Enter the name of the device in the "System Name" input box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.2.2
Coordinates
Information on geographic coordinates
In the "Geographic Coordinates" window, you can enter information on the geographic
coordinates. The parameters of the geographic coordinates (latitude, longitude and the
height above the ellipsoid according to WGS84) are entered directly in the input boxes of the
"Geographic Coordinates" window.
Getting the coordinates
Use suitable maps for obtaining the geographic coordinates of the device.
The geographic coordinates can also be obtained using a GPS receiver. The geographic
coordinates of these devices are normally displayed directly and only need to be entered in
the input boxes of this page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
126
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes. These are purely information boxes with a maximum
length of 32 characters.
● "Latitude" input box
Geographical latitude: Here, enter the value for the northerly or southerly latitude of the
location of the device.
For example, the value +49° 1´31.67" means that the device is located at 49 degrees, 1
arc minute and 31.67 arc seconds northerly latitude.
A southerly latitude is shown by a preceding minus character.
You can also append the letters N (northerly latitude) or S (southerly latitude) to the
numeric information (49° 1´31.67" N).
● "Longitude" input box
Geographical longitude: Here, you enter the value of the eastern or western longitude of
the location of the device.
The value +8° 20´58.73" means that the device is located at 8 degrees, 20 minutes and
58.73 seconds east.
A western longitude is indicated by a preceding minus sign.
You can also add the letter E (easterly longitude) or W (westerly longitude) to the numeric
information (8° 20´58.73" E).
● Input box: "Height"
Geographical height: Here, you enter the value of the geographic height above sea level
in meters.
For example, 158 m means that the device is located at a height of 158 m above sea
level.
Heights below sea level (for example the Dead Sea) are indicated by a preceding minus
sign.
Procedure
1. Enter the latitude in the "Latitude" input box.
2. Enter the longitude in the "Longitude" input box.
3. Enter the height in the "Height" input box.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
127
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.3
Agent IP
Configuration of the IP addresses
On this WBM page, you configure the IP address for the device.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● IP Assignment Method
Shows how the IP address is assigned.
– Static
The IP address is static. You enter the IP settings in the "IP Address" and "Subnet
Mask" input boxes.
– Dynamic (DHCP)
The device obtains a dynamic IP address from a DHCP server.
● "IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address of the device.
After clicking the "Set Values" button, this IP address is also displayed in the address bar
of the Web browser. If this does not take place automatically, you will need to enter the IP
address in the address bar of the Web browser manually.
● "Subnet Mask" input box
Enter the subnet mask of the device.
● "Default Gateway" input box
Enter the IP address of the default gateway to be able to communicate with devices in
another subnet, for example diagnostics stations, e-mail server.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
128
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● "Agent VLAN ID" drop-down list
Select the VLAN ID from the drop-down list. The drop-down list is available only if the
"Base Bridge Mode" parameter is set to "802.1 Q VLAN Bridge". You can configure the
parameter in "Layer 2 > VLAN > General". You can only select VLANs that have already
been configured.
Note
Changing the Agent VLAN ID
If the configuration PC is connected directly to the device via Ethernet and you change
the Agent VLAN ID, the device is no longer reachable via Ethernet following the change.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the device. The MAC address is linked to the hardware and
cannot be modified.
Procedure
1. In the input boxes, enter the IP address, subnet mask and the default gateway.
2. Select the assigned VLAN ID from the "Agent VLAN ID" drop-down list. If the drop-down
list cannot be enabled, check whether the "Base Bridge Mode" parameter is set to "802.1
Q VLAN Bridge". You can configure the parameter in "Layer 2 > VLAN > General".
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
129
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.4
DNS Client
On this page, you configure the DNS server for the device.
Note
Only resource records of type A (IPv4 address of a host) are supported.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "DNS Client" check box
If the check box is enabled, the "DNS client" function is enabled.
● "Used DNS Server" drop-down list
Here you specify which DNS server the device uses:
– public only
The device uses only the DNS servers assigned by DHCP.
– manual only
The device uses only the manually configured DNS servers. The DNS servers must
be connected to the Internet. A maximum of three DNS servers can be configured.
– all
The device uses all available DNS servers.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
130
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● "Name Server Address" input box
When configuring manually, you enter the IP address of a DNS server here. After clicking
the "Create" button, an entry is generated in the table of DNS servers.
● The table for the DNS servers with the following columns:
– Select
Select a check box in this column and click the "Delete" button to delete an entry in
the list.
– Name Server Address
The IP address of the DNS server.
– Origin
This shows whether the DNS server was configured manually or was assigned by
DHCP.
5.5.5
Restart
Resetting to the defaults
In this menu, there is a button with which you can restart the device and various options for
resetting to the device defaults.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
131
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Note
Note the following points about restarting a device:
• You can only restart the device with administrator privileges.
• A device should only be restarted with the buttons of this menu or with the appropriate
CLI commands and not by a power cycle on the device.
• Any modifications you have made only become active on the device after clicking the "Set
Values" button on the relevant WBM page. If the device is in "Trial Mode", configuration
modifications must be saved manually before a restart. In "Autosave mode", the last
changes are saved automatically before a restart.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
132
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
To restart the device, the buttons on this page provide you with the following options:
● "Restart System" button
Click this button to restart the system. You must confirm the restart in a dialog box.
During a restart, the device is reinitialized, the internal firmware is reloaded, and the
device runs a self-test. The learned entries in the address table are deleted. You can
leave the browser window open while the device restarts. You then need to log in again.
● "Restore Memory Defaults and Restart" button
Click this button to restore the factory configuration settings with the exception of the
following parameters and to restart:
– IP addresses
– Subnet mask
– IP address of the default gateway
– DHCP client ID
– DHCP
– System name
– System location
– System contact
– User names and passwords
– Mode of the device
● "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart" button
Click this button to restore the factory defaults for the configuration. The protected
defaults are also reset.
An automatic restart is triggered.
Note
By resetting all the defaults to the factory configuration settings, the IP address is also
lost. Following this, the device can only be accessed using the Primary Setup Tool or
using DHCP.
With the appropriate attachment, a previously correctly configured device can cause
circulating frames and therefore the failure of the data traffic.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
133
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.6
Commit Control
Change management
On this page, you specify when the WLAN settings become effective on the device.
If you change a WLAN setting and confirm the change with "Set Values", this change is
adopted and takes effect immediately. To do this, the WLAN connection is briefly interrupted.
This means that you can lose the WLAN connection to your device before it is fully
configured.
With the "Manual Commit" setting, you have the opportunity of first fully configuring the
device. The changes are accepted, but are not active immediately. The changes only take
effect when you confirm the changes with the "Commit Changes" button.
Note
If you configure the device via the WLAN interface, we recommend that you use the "Manual
Commit" setting. Check the parameters again before you confirm the changes with the
"Commit Changes" button.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Drop-down list "Commit Mode"
Select the required setting from the drop-down list:
– Automatic Commit
Each change in the WLAN settings is adopted and is immediately effective when you
click the "Set Values" button. With its default setting, the device is set to Automatic
Commit.
– Manual Commit
Die changes are accepted, but are not immediately effective. The changes only take
effect when you click the "Commit Changes" button. The "Commit Changes" button is
displayed if you set "Manual Commit". The message "Manual Commit Mode Active Press "Commit Changes" button to provide current configuration to driver" is also
displayed in the display area as soon as there are WLAN changes. This message can
be seen on every WBM page until the changes made have either taken effect or the
device has been restarted.
Note
When the changes take effect, the WLAN connections to all WLAN interfaces will be
interrupted for a short time. The WLAN driver is started with the new settings.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
134
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.7
Load&Save
Overview of the file types
Table 5- 1
HTTP
File type
Download
Save
Delete
Config
Start configuration
X
X
--
ConfigPack
Detailed configuration information. for example,
start configuration, users, certificates
X
X
--
CountryList
The zip file contains the country list as a csv and as
a pdf file.
--
X
--
Debug
This file contains information for Siemens Support.
--
X
X
Firmware
Firmware
X
--
--
GSDML
Information on the device properties
--
X
--
HTTPS Cert
HTTPS certificate
X
--
X
LogFile
File with entries from the event log table
--
X
--
MIB
Private MSPS MIB file "Scalance_w_msps.mib"
--
X
--
Script
CLI script file
X
--
--
StartupInfo
Startup log file
--
X
--
Users
File with user names and passwords
X
X
--
WLANAuthlo File with entries from the WLAN Authentication Log
g
(information on successful or failed authentication
attempts)
--
X
--
WLANCert
(in client
mode only)
X
X
X
WLANServC Server certificate.
ert
(in client
mode only)
X
--
X
WLANSigRe The zip file contains the following:
c
• csv file with the measured values of the signal
(in client
recorder
mode only)
• pdf file with the measured values and an additional graphic representation of the measured
values.
You will find information about the measured values and their graphic representation in the section
"Signal Recorder (Page 220)".
--
X
X
User certificate. You can specify a password for the
user certificate on the WBM page "Load&Save >
Password".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
135
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Table 5- 2
TFTP
File type
Save
Download
Config
Start configuration
X
X
ConfigPack
Detailed configuration information. for example, start
configuration, users, certificates
X
X
CountryList
The zip file contains the country list as a csv and as a
pdf file.
X
--
Debug
This file contains information for Siemens Support.
X
--
Firmware
Firmware
X
X
GSDML
Information on the device properties
X
--
HTTPS Cert
HTTPS certificate
X
X
LogFile
File with entries from the event log table
X
--
MIB
Private MSPS MIB file "Scalance_w_msps.mib"
X
--
Script
CLI script file
--
X
StartupInfo
Startup log file
X
--
Users
File with user names and passwords
X
X
WLANAuthlog
File with entries from the WLAN Authentication Log
(information on successful or failed authentication
attempts)
X
--
WLANCert
User certificate. You can specify a password for the
(in client mode only) user certificate on the WBM page "Load&Save >
Password".
X
X
WLANServerCert
Server certificate
(in client mode only)
X
X
WLANSigRec
The zip file contains the following:
(in client mode only)
• csv file with the measured values of the signal
recorder
X
--
pdf file with the measured values and an additional graphic representation of the measured values.
You will find information about the measured values
and their graphic representation in the section "Signal
Recorder (Page 220)".
•
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
136
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.7.1
HTTP
Loading and saving data via HTTP
The WBM allows you to store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load such
data from an external file from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you can
also load new firmware from a file located on your client PC.
Note
Incompatibility with predecessor versions
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data and log files can be lost.
In this case, the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been
installed.
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data and log files can be lost.
In this case, the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been
installed. In this situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has
the status "Not Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous
more up-to-date firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date
firmware without any loss of configuration data.
If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or
rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
Note
Configuration files and trial mode/Automatic Save mode
In Automatic Save mode, the data is saved automatically before the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config) are transferred.
In Trial mode, although the changes are adopted, they are not saved in the configuration
files (ConfigPack and Config). Use the "Write Startup Config" button on the "System >
Configuration" WBM page to save changes in the configuration files.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
137
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Type
Shows the file type.
● Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
● Load
With this button, you can upload files to the device. The button can be enabled, if this
function is supported by the file type.
● Save
With this button, you can save files from the device. The button can only be enabled if
this function is supported by the file type and the file exists on the device.
● Delete
With this button, you can delete files from the device. The button can only be enabled if
this function is supported by the file type and the file exists on the device.
Note
Following a firmware update, delete the cache of the Web browser.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
138
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
Loading files using HTTP
1. Start the load function by clicking the one of the "Load" buttons.
The dialog for loading a file opens.
2. Go to the file you want to load.
3. Click the "Open" button in the dialog.
The file is now loaded.
Whether or not a restart is necessary, depends on the loaded file. If a restart is necessary, a
message to this effect will be output. Other files are executed immediately, for example the
CLI script file and new settings are applied without a restart.
Saving files using HTTP
1. Start the save function by clicking the one of the "Save" buttons.
2. You will be prompted to select a storage location and a name for the file. Or you accept
the proposed file name. To make the selection, use the dialog in your browser. After
making your selection, click the "Save" button.
Deleting files using HTTP
1. Start the delete function by clicking the one of the "Delete" buttons.
The file will be deleted.
Reusing configuration data
If several devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are assigned
using DHCP, the effort for configuration can be reduced by saving and reading in the
configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Download this configuration file to all other devices you want to configure.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.
Note that the configuration data is coded when it is saved. This means that you cannot edit
the files with a text editor.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
139
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.7.2
TFTP
Loading and saving data via a TFTP server
On this page, you can configure the TFTP server and the file names. The WBM also allows
you to store device data in an external file on your client PC or to load such data from an
external file from the PC to the devices. This means, for example, that you can also load new
firmware from a file located on your client PC.
Note
Incompatibility with predecessor versions
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data and log files can be lost.
In this case, the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been
installed.
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data and log files can be lost.
In this case, the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been
installed. In this situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has
the status "Not Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous
more up-to-date firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date
firmware without any loss of configuration data.
If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or
rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
Note
Configuration files and trial mode/Automatic Save mode
In Automatic Save mode, the data is saved automatically before the configuration files
(ConfigPack and Config) are transferred.
In Trial mode, although the changes are adopted, they are not saved in the configuration
files (ConfigPack and Config). Use the "Write Startup Config" button on the "System >
Configuration" WBM page to save changes in the configuration files.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
140
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Input box "TFTP Server IP Address"
Here, enter the IP address of the TFTP server with which you exchange data.
● TFTP Server Port
Here, enter the port of the TFTP server over which data exchange will be handled. If
necessary, you can change the default value 69 to your own requirements.
The table has the following columns:
● Type
Shows the file type.
● Description
Shows the short description of the file type.
● Input box "Filename"
Enter a file name.
● Drop-down list "Actions"
Select the action from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the selected file type,
for example the log file can only be saved.
The following actions are possible:
– Save file
With this selection, you save a file on the TFTP server.
– Load file
With this selection, you load a file from the TFTP server.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
141
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
Loading or saving data using TFTP
1. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server IP Address" input box.
2. Enter the server port to be used in the in the "TFTP Server Port" input box.
3. Enter the name of a file in which you want to save the data or take the data from in the
"Filename" input box.
4. Select the action you want to execute from the "Actions" drop-down list.
5. Click the "Set Values" button to start the selected actions.
6. After loading the configuration and the SSL certificate, restart the device. The changes
only take effect a restart.
Reusing configuration data
If several devices are to receive the same configuration and the IP addresses are assigned
using DHCP, the effort for configuration can be reduced by saving and reading in the
configuration data.
Follow the steps below to reuse configuration data:
1. Save the configuration data of a configured device on your PC.
2. Download this configuration file to all other devices you want to configure.
3. If individual settings are necessary for specific devices, these must be made online on the
relevant device.
Note that the configuration data is coded when it is saved. This means that you cannot edit
the files with a text editor.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
142
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.7.3
Passwords
Password for user certificate
With this menu item, you specify whether the user certificate needs a password.
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Type
Shows the user certificate
● Description
Shows the short description of the user certificate.
● Enabled
Specifies whether the user certificate needs a password. If you enable the settings,
specify the password in "Password".
● Password
Enter the password for the user certificate.
Note
When assigning the password, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
143
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● Password Confirmation
Confirm the password.
● Status
Shows whether the current settings for the certificate match the device.
– Valid
The settings are valid.
– Invalid
The settings are invalid.
Procedure
1. Select the "Enabled" option.
2. Enter the password in "Password".
3. To confirm the password, enter the password again in "Password Confirmation".
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
144
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.8
Events
5.5.8.1
Configuration
Selecting system events
On this page, you specify how a device reacts to system events. By enabling the appropriate
options, you specify how the device reacts to events. To enable or disable the options, click
the relevant check boxes of the columns.
Description
With Table 1, you can enable or disable all check boxes of a column of Table 2 at once.
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Event
Shows that the settings are valid for all events of table 2.
● E-Mail / Trap / Log Table / Syslog / Fault
Enable or disable the required type of notification for all events. If "No Change" is
selected, the entries of the corresponding column in Table 2 remain unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all events of table 2.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
145
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Event
The column contains the following values:
– Cold/Warm Start
The device was turned on or restarted by the user.
– Link Change
This event occurs only when the port status is monitored and has changed, see
"System > Fault Monitoring > Link Change".
– Authentication Failure
This event occurs when attempting access with a bad password.
– Power Change
This event occurs when power supply lines 1 and 2 are monitored. It indicates that
there was a change to line 1 or line 2. The event occurs when the PoE power supply
has failed, see "System > Fault Monitoring > Power Supply".
– Spanning Tree Change
The STP or RSTP or MSTP topology has changed.
– Fault State Change
The fault status has changed. The fault status can relate to the activated port
monitoring, the response of the signaling contact or the power supply monitoring.
– Overlap AP Detection (Only in access point mode)
This event is triggered when there is an entry in the overlap AP list.
– WDS (Only in access point mode)
The connection status of a WDS link has changed.
– DFS (Only in access point mode)
This event occurs if a radar signal was received or the DFS scan was started or
stopped.
– WLAN General (Only in access point mode)
This event occurs if a the channel bandwidth has changed.
– WLAN Authentication Log
Forwarding of the entries from the WLAN Authentication Log to the system protocol
server.
– WLAN De/Authentication (Only in client mode)
With successful or failed WLAN authentication attempts.
– iPCF Cycle Time (Only in access point mode)
Only available when the KEY-PLUG is inserted.
This event occurs if too many clients are logged on for the set iPCF cycle time or if
some clients were not reached in one cycle.
– iPCF Poll Size
Only available when the KEY-PLUG is inserted.
This event occurs if the PNIO data size is too large for transfer.
● E-Mail
The device sends an e-mail. This is only possible if the SMTP server is set up and the
"SMTP client" function is enabled.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
146
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● Trap
The device sends an SNMP trap. This is only possible if "System > Configuration"
SNMPv1 Traps" is enabled.
● Log Table
The device writes an entry in the event log table.
● Syslog
The device writes an entry to the system log server. This is only possible if the system log
server is set up and the "Syslog client" function is enabled.
● Fault
The device triggers a fault. The error LED lights up.
Procedure
Follow the steps below to change entries:
1. Select the check box in the row of the required event. Select the event in the column
under the following actions:
– E-mail
– Trap
– Log table
– Syslog
– Fault
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.8.2
Severity Filter
Setting the severity filter
On this page, set the threshold levels for sending system event notifications.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
147
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
The first table column shows the client type for which you are making the settings:
● E-Mail
Sending system event messages by e-mail
● Log Table
Entry of system events in the log table
● Syslog
Entry of system events in the Syslog file
Select the required level from the drop-down lists of the second table column.
You can select from the following values:
● Critical
System events are processed as of the severity level "Critical".
● Warning
System events are processed as of the severity level "Warning".
● Info
System events are processed as of the severity level "Info".
Procedure
Follow the steps below to configure the required level:
1. Select the required values from the drop-down lists of the second table column after the
client types.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.9
SMTP Client
Network monitoring with e-mails
The device provides the option of automatically sending an e-mail if an alarm event occurs
(for example to the network administrator). The e-mail contains the identification of the
sending device, a description of the cause of the alarm in plain language, and a time stamp.
This allows centralized network monitoring to be set up for networks with few nodes based
on an e-mail system. When an e-mail error message is received, the WBM can be started by
the Internet browser using the identification of the sender to read out further diagnostics
information.
On this page, you can configure up to three SMTP servers and the corresponding e-mail
addresses.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
148
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● SMTP Client
Enable or disable the SMTP client.
● Sender Email Address
Enter the name of the sender to be included in the e-mail, for example the device name.
This setting applies to all configured SMTP servers.
● Send Test Mail
Send a test e-mail to check your configuration.
● SMTP Port
Enter the port via which your SMTP server can be reached.
Factory settings: 25
This setting applies to all configured SMTP servers.
● SMTP Server IP Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the SMTP server.
This table contains the following columns:
● Select
Enable the check box in a row to be deleted.
● SMTP Server Address
Shows the IP address or the FQDN name of the SMTP server.
● Receiver Email Address
Enter the e-mail address to which the device sends an e-mail if a fault occurs.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
149
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
1. Enable the "SMTP Client" option.
2. Enter the IP address of the SMTP server or the FQDN name in the "SMTP Server IP
Address" input box.
3. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
4. In the "Receiver Email Address" input box, enter the e-mail address to which the device is
to send an e-mail if a fault occurs.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
Depending on the properties and configuration of the SMTP server, it may be necessary
to adapt the "Sender Email Address” box for the e-mails. Check with the administrator of
the SMTP server.
5.5.10
DHCP
5.5.10.1
DHCP Client
Setting the DHCP mode
If the DHCP mode is activated, the DHCP client starts a DHCP request to a configured
DHCP server and is assigned an IPv4 address as the response. The server manages an
address range from which it assigns IPv4 addresses. It is also possible to configure the
server so that the client always receives the same IPv4 address in response to its request.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
150
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "DHCP Client Configuration Request (Opt.66, 67)" check box
Select this option if you want the DHCP client to use options 66 and 67 to download and
then enable a configuration file.
● "DHCP Mode" drop-down list
Select the DHCP mode from the drop-down list. The following modes are possible:
– via MAC Address
Identification is based on the MAC address.
– via DHCP Client ID
Identification is based on a freely defined DHCP client ID.
– via System Name
Identification is based on the system name. If the system name is 255 characters long,
the last character is not used for identification.
– via PNIO Name of Station
Identification is based on the PNIO name of the station.
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Interface to which the setting relates.
● DHCP
Enable or disable the DHCP client for the relevant interface.
Procedure
Follow the steps below to configure the IP address using the DHCP client ID:
1. Enable the "DHCP Client" option.
2. Select the DHCP mode "via DHCP Client ID" from the "DHCP Mode" drop-down list.
3. Enter a character string to identify the device in the enabled "DHCP Client ID" input box.
This is then evaluated by the DHCP server.
4. Select the "Client Configuration Request (Opt.66, 67)" option, if you want the DHCP client
to use options 66 and 67 to download and then enable a configuration file.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
If a configuration file is downloaded, this triggers a system restart. Make sure that the
option "Client Configuration Request (Opt.66, 67)" is no longer set in this configuration
file.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
151
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.10.2
DHCP Server
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
You can operate the device as a DHCP server. This allows IPv4 addresses to be assigned
automatically to the connected devices. The IPv4 addresses are either distributed
dynamically from an address band you have specified or a specific IPv4 address (static) can
be assigned to a particular device.
On this page, specify the IPv4 address band from which the DHCP client receives any IPv4
address. You configure the static assignment of the IPv4 addresses in "Static Leases".
Requirements for the DHCP server
● NAT is enabled. You enable NAT in "Layer 3 > NAT".
● The connected devices are configured so that they obtain the IPv4 address from a DHCP
server.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
152
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Enable DHCP Server" check box
Enable or disable the DHCP server on the device.
Note
To avoid conflicts with IPv4 addresses, only one device may be configured as a DHCP
server in the network.
● "Probe address with ICMP Echo before offer" check box
When selected, the DHCP server checks whether or not the IP address has already been
assigned. To do this the DHCP server sends ICMP echo messages (ping) to the IPv4
address. If no reply is received, the DHCP server can assign the IPv4 address.
Note
If there are devices in your network on which the echo service is disabled as default,
there may be conflicts with the IPv4 addresses. To avoid this, assign these devices an
IPv4 address outside the IPv4 address band.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
● Pool ID
Shows the number of the IPv4 address band. If you click the "Create" button, a new row
with a unique number (Pool ID) is created.
Note
Only one Pool ID (ID = 1) can be created.
● Interface
Specify the interface via which the IPv4 addresses are dynamically assigned.
● Enable
Specify whether or not this IPv4 address band will be used.
Note
If you enable the IPv4 address band, the tabs "DHCP Options" and "Static Leases" are
grayed out and cannot be configured.
Subnet
Enter the network address range that will be assigned to the devices. Use the CIDR
notation.
● Lower IP Address
Enter the IPv4 address that specifies the start of the dynamic IPv4 address band. The
IPv4 address must be within the network address range you configured for "Subnet".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
153
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● Upper IP Address
Enter the IPv4 address that specifies the end of the dynamic IPv4 address band. The
IPv4 address must be within the network address range you configured for "Subnet".
● Lease Time [sec]
Specify for how many seconds the assigned IPv4 address remains valid. Once this period
has elapsed, the device must either request a new IPv4 address or extend the lease time
of the existing IPv4 address.
5.5.10.3
DHCP Options
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
On this page you specify which DHCP options the DHCP server supports. The various
DHCP options are defined in RFC 2132.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
154
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Pool ID" drop-down list
Select the required IPv4 address band.
● "Option Code" input box
Enter the number of the required DHCP option. The various DHCP options are defined in
RFC 2132. The DHCP options 1, 3, 6, 66 and 67 are created automatically when the IPv4
address band is created. With the exception of option 1, the options can be deleted.
With the DHCP option 3, the internal IPv4 address of the device is automatically set as a
DHCP parameter.
Note
DHCP options not supported
The DHCP options 50 - 60 and 255 are not supported.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
● Pool ID
Shows the number of the IPv4 address band.
● Option Code
Shows the number of the DHCP option.
● Use Interface IP
Specify whether or not the internal IPv4 address of the device will be used.
● Value
Enter the DHCP parameter that is transferred to the DHCP client. The content depends
on the DHCP option.
– DHCP option 67 (boot file name)
Enter the name of the boot file in the string format.
– DHCP options 3 (router), 6 (DNS) and 66 (TFTP server):
Enter the DHCP parameter as an IPv4 address, e.g. 192.168.100.2. With the
exception of DHCP option 3, you can specify several IPv4 addresses separated by
commas.
– All other DHCP options
Enter the DHCP parameter in hexadecimal, e.g. the IPv4 address 192.168.100.2
corresponds to "C0A86402".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
155
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.10.4
Static Leases
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
On this page you specify that devices with a certain MAC address are assigned to the
selected IPv4 address.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Pool ID" drop-down list
Select the required IPv4 address band.
● "Hardware Type" drop-down list
Ethernet MAC
Identification is based on the MAC address. Enter the MAC address in "Value". A MAC
address consists of six byes separated by hyphens in hexadecimal notation, e.g. 00-ab1d-df-b4-1d.
● "Value" input box
Enter the MAC address and click the "Create" button to create the entry. A maximum of
20 entries are possible.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
● Pool ID
Shows the number of the IPv4 address band.
Note
Only Pool ID = 1 is supported.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
156
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● HW Type
Shows that the IPv4 address depends on the MAC address.
● Value
Shows the MAC address to which the IPv4 address is assigned.
● IP Address
Specify the IPv4 address. The IPv4 address must match the subnet of the IPv4 address
band.
5.5.11
SNMP
5.5.11.1
General
Configuration of SNMP
On this page, you make the basic settings for SNMP. Enable the check boxes according to
the function you want to use.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
157
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "SNMPv1/v2c/v3" drop-down list
Select the SNMP protocol from the drop-down list. The following settings are possible:
– "-" (disabled)
SNMP is disabled.
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
SNMPv1/v2c/v3 is supported.
– SNMPv3
Only SNMPv3 is supported.
● "SNMPv1/v2c Read Only" check box
If you enable this option, SNMPv1/v2c can only read the SNMP variables.
Note
Community String
For security reasons, do not use the standard values "public" or "private". Change the
community strings following the initial installation.
● "SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community String" input box
Enter the community string for read and write access of the SNMP protocol.
● "SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String" input box
Enter the community string for access of the SNMP protocol.
● "SNMPv1 Traps" check box
Enable or disable the sending of traps (alarm frames). On the "Trap" tab, specify the IP
addresses of the devices to which SNMP traps will be sent.
● "SNMPv1/v2c Trap Community String" input box
Enter the community string for sending SNMPv1/v2 messages.
Procedure
1. Select the required option from the "SNMP" drop-down list:
– "-" (disabled)
– SNMPv1/v2c/v3
– SNMPv3
2. Enable the "SNMPv1/v2c Read only" check box if you only want read access to SNMP
variables with SNMPv1/v2c.
3. Enter the required character string in the "SNMPv1/v2c Read Community String" input
box.
4. Enter the required character string in the "SNMPv1/v2c Read/Write Community String"
input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
158
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.11.2
Traps
SNMP traps for alarm events
If an alarm event occurs, a device can send SNMP traps (alarm frames) to up to ten different
management stations at the same time. Traps are only sent if the events specified in the
"Events" menu occur.
Note
Traps are sent only when the "SNMPv1 Traps" option was selected in the "General" or
"System > Confguration" tab.
Description
● IP Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the station to which the device sends SNMP
traps. You can specify up to ten different recipients servers.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the row you want to delete.
● IP Address
If necessary, change the IP addresses or the FQDN names of the stations.
● Trap
Enable or disable the sending of traps. Stations that are entered but not selected do not
receive SNMP traps.
Procedure
Creating a trap entry
1. In "IP Address", enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the station to which the
device sends traps.
2. Click the "Create" button to create a new trap entry.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
159
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
3. Select the check box in the required row "Trap".
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting a trap entry
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.
5.5.11.3
v3 Groups
Security settings and assigning permissions
SNMP version 3 allows permissions to be assigned, authentication, and encryption at
protocol level. The security levels and read/write permissions are assigned according to
groups. The settings automatically apply to every member of a group.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Group Name
Enter the name of the group. The maximum length is 32 characters.
● Security Level
Select the security level (authentication, encryption) valid for
the selected group. In the security levels, the following options:
– No Auth/no Priv
No authentication enabled, no encryption enabled.
– Auth/no Priv
Authentication enabled / no encryption enabled.
– Auth/Priv
Authentication enabled / encryption enabled.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
160
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the row you want to delete.
● Group Name
Shows the defined group names.
● Security Level
Shows the configured security level.
● Read
Enable or disable read access for the required group.
● Write
Enable or disable wite access for the required group.
Note
For write access to work, you also need to enable read access.
● Persistence
Shows whether or not the group is assigned to an SNMPv3 user. If the group is not
assigned to an SNMPv3 user, no automatic saving is triggered and the configured group
disappears again after restarting the device.
– Yes
The group is assigned to an SNMPV3 user.
– No
The group is not assigned to an SNMPV3 user.
Procedure
Creating a new group
1. Enter the required group name in "Group Name".
2. Select the required security level from the "Security Level" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Create" button to create a new entry.
4. Specify the required read rights for the group in " Read".
5. Specify the required write rights for the group in " Write".
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
161
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Modifying a group
1. Specify the required read rights for the group in " Read".
2. Specify the required write rights for the group in " Write".
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
Once a group name and the security level have been specified, they can no longer be
modified after the group is created. If you want to change the group name or the security
level , you will need to delete the group and recreate it and reconfigure it with the new
name.
Deleting a group
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all groups you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted.
5.5.11.4
v3 Users
User-specific security settings
On the WBM page, you can create new SNMPv3 users and modify or delete existing users.
The user-based security model works with the concept of the user name; in other words, a
user ID is added to every frame. This user name and the applicable security settings are
checked by both the sender and recipient.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
162
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● User Name
Enter a freely selectable user name. After you have entered the data, you can no longer
modify the name.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the row you want to delete.
● User Name
Shows the created users.
● Group Name
Select the group to which the user will be assigned.
● Authentication Protocol
Specify the authentication protocol. Can only be enabled, if this group supports the
function.
The following settings are available:
– none
– MD5
– SHA
● Privacy Protocol
Specify whether or not the user uses the DES algorithm. Can only be enabled, if the
group supports this function.
● Authentication Password
Enter the authentication password in the first input box. This password must have at least
6 characters, the maximum length is 32 characters.
● Authentication Password Confirmation
Confirm the password by repeating the entry.
● Privacy Password
Enter your encryption password. This password must have at least 6 characters, the
maximum length is 32 characters.
● Privacy Password Confirmation
Confirm the encryption password by repeating the entry.
● Persistence
Shows whether or not the user is assigned to an SNMPv3 group. If the user is not
assigned to an SNMPv3 group, no automatic saving is triggered and the configured user
disappears again after restarting the device.
– Yes
The user is assigned to an SNMPv3 group.
– No
The user is not assigned to an SNMPv3 group.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
163
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
Create a new user
1. Enter the name of the new user in the "User Name" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
3. In "Groups", select the group to which the new user will belong.
If the group has not yet been created, change to the "v3 Groups" page and make the
settings for this group.
4. If an authentication is necessary for the selected group, select the authentication
algorithm in "Authentification Protocol".
In the relevant input boxes, enter the authentication password and its confirmation.
5. If encryption was specified for the group, select the algorithm from the "Privacy Protocol"
drop-down list. In the relevant input boxes, enter the encryption password and the
confirmation.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
Delete user
1. Enable "Select" in the row to be deleted.
Repeat this for all users you want to delete.
2. Click the "Delete" button. The entry is deleted.
Note
If you click a different button prior to this step (for example the "Refresh" button), the
delete action is canceled. The data of the selected rows is retained. The selections are
removed. If you want to repeat the action, you will need to reselect the data records to be
deleted.
5.5.12
System Time
There are different methods that can be used to set the system time of the device. Only one
method can be active at any one time.
If one method is activated, the previously activated method is automatically deactivated.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
164
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.12.1
Manual Setting
Manual setting of the system time
On this page, you set the date and time of the system yourself. For this setting to be used,
enable "Time Manually".
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Time Manually
Enable or disable manual setting of the time. If you enable the option, the "System Time"
input box can be edited.
● System Time
Enter the date and time in the format "MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM:SS".
With the manual time setting, the time of day is stored once a day in the internal memory
of the device. This value is set as the system time following a device restart and therefore
differs by less than 24 hours from the actual time of day. If the device is reset to the
factory settings, the time is set to the value 01/01/2000 00:00:00.
● Use PC Time
Click the button to use the time setting of the PC.
● Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place. If
no time-of-day synchronization was possible, the box displays "Date/time not set".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
165
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed.
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
● Daylight Saving Time
Shows whether the daylight saving time changeover is active:
– active (+1 hour)
The time in "Current System Time" is daylight saving time.
– inactive (+0 hours)
The time in "Current System Time" is not daylight saving time.
Procedure
1. Enable the "Time Manually" option.
2. Click in the "System Time" input box.
3. In the "System Time" input box, enter the date and time in the format "MM/DD/YYYY
HH:MM:SS".
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
The date and time are adopted and "Manual" is entered in the "Last Synchronization
Mechanism" box.
5.5.12.2
DST Overview
On this page, you can create new entries for the daylight saving time changeover.
The table provides an overview of the existing entries.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
166
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Settings
Figure 5-2
DST Overview
● Select
Select the row you want to delete.
● DST No.
Shows the number of the entry.
If you create a new entry, a new line with a unique number is created.
● Name
Shows the name of the entry.
● Year
Shows the year for which the entry was created.
● Start Date
Shows the month, day and time for the start of daylight saving time.
● End Date
Shows the month, day and time for the end of daylight saving time.
● Type
Shows how the daylight saving time changeover is made:
– Date
A fixed date is entered for the daylight saving time changeover.
– Recurring
A rule was defined for the daylight saving time changeover.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
167
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.12.3
DST Configuration
On this page, you can configure the entries for the daylight saving time changeover. As
result of the changeover to daylight saving or standard time, the system time for the local
time zone is correctly set.
You can define a rule for the daylight saving time changeover or specify a fixed date.
Settings
Note
The content of this page depends on the selection in the "Type" box.
The boxes "DST No.", "Type" and "Name" are always displayed.
● DST No.
Select the type of the entry.
● Type
Select how the daylight saving time changeover is made:
– Date
You can set a fixed date for the daylight saving time changeover.
This setting is suitable for regions in which the daylight saving time changeover is not
governed by rules.
– Recurring
You can define a rule for the daylight saving time changeover.
This setting is suitable for regions in which the daylight saving time always begins or
ends on a certain weekday.
● Name
Enter a name for the entry.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
168
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Settings with "Date" selected
Figure 5-3
DST Configuration Date
You can set a fixed date for the start and end of daylight saving time.
● Year
Enter the year for the daylight saving time changeover.
● Start Date
Enter the following values for the start of daylight saving time:
– Day
Specify the day.
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
● End Date
Enter the following values for the end of daylight saving time:
– Day
Specify the day.
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
169
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Settings with "Recurring" selected
Figure 5-4
DST Configuration Recurring
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
170
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
You can create a rule for the daylight saving time changeover.
● Start Date
Enter the following values for the start of daylight saving time:
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
– Week
Specify the week.
You can select the 1st to 5th or the last week of the month.
– Weekday
Specify the weekday.
● End Date
Enter the following values for the end of daylight saving time:
– Hour
Specify the hour.
– Month
Specify the month.
– Week
Specify the week.
You can select the 1st to 5th or the last week of the month.
– Weekday
Specify the weekday.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
171
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.12.4
SNTP Client
Time-of-day synchronization in the network
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol) is used for synchronizing the time in the network. The
appropriate frames are sent by an SNTP server in the network.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● SNTP Client
Enable or disable automatic time-of-day synchronization using SNTP.
● Current System Time
Shows the values currently set in the system for date and time.
● Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
172
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
● Daylight Saving Time
Shows whether the daylight saving time changeover is active:
– active (+1 hour)
The time in "Current System Time" is daylight saving time.
– inactive (+0 hours)
The time in "Current System Time" is not daylight saving time.
● Time Zone
Enter the time zone you are using in the format "+/- HH:MM". The time zone relates to
UTC standard world time. Settings for daylight-saving and standard time are taken into
account in this box by specifying the time offset.
● SNTP Mode
Select the synchronization mode from the drop-down list. The following types of
synchronization are possible:
– Poll
If you select this protocol type, the input boxes "SNTP Server IP Address", "SNTP
Server Port" and "Poll Interval(s)" are displayed for further configuration. With this type
of synchronization, the device is active and sends a time query to the SNTP server.
– Listen
With this type of synchronization, the device is passive and "listens" for SNTP frames
that deliver the time of day.
● SNTP Server IP Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the SNTP server.
● SNTP Server Port
Enter the port of the SNTP server.
The following ports are possible:
– 123 (standard port)
– 1025 to 36564
● Poll Interval(s)
Here, enter the interval between two-time queries. In this box, you enter the query interval
in seconds. Possible values are 16 to 16284 seconds.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
173
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
1. Click the "SNTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting.
2. In the "Time Zone" input box, enter the local time difference to world time (UTC). The
input format is "+/-HH:MM" (for example +02:00 for CEST), because the SNTP server
always sends the UTC time. This time is then recalculated and displayed as the local time
based on the specified time zone. On the device itself, there is no changeover from the
daylight saving to standard time. You also need to take this into account when completing
the "Time Zone" input box.
3. Select one of the following options from the "SNTP Mode" drop-down list:
– Poll
For this mode, you need to configure the following:
- time zone difference (step 2)
- time server (step 4)
- Port (step 5)
- query interval (step 6)
- complete the configuration with step 7.
– Listen
For this mode, you need to configure the following:
- time difference to the time sent by the server (step 2)
- complete the configuration with step 7.
4. In the "SNTP Server IP Address" input box, enter the IP address or the FQDN name of
the SNTP server whose frames will be used to synchronize the time of day.
5. In the "SNTP Server Port" input box, enter the port via which the SNTP server is
available. The port can only be modified if the IP address or the FQDN name of the SNTP
server is entered.
6. In the "Poll Interval(s)" input box, enter the time in seconds after which a new time query
is sent to the time server.
7. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer your changes to the device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
174
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.12.5
NTP Client
Automatic time-of-day setting with NTP
If you require time-of-day synchronization using NTP, you can make the relevant settings
here.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● NTP Client
Select this check box to enable automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP.
● Current System Time
This box displays the current system time.
● Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
● Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
175
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● Daylight Saving Time
Shows whether the daylight saving time changeover is active:
– active (+1 hour)
The time in "Current System Time" is daylight saving time.
– inactive (+0 hours)
The time in "Current System Time" is not daylight saving time.
● Time Zone
In this box, enter the time zone you are using in the format "+/- HH:MM". The time zone
relates to UTC standard world time. Settings for daylight-saving and standard time are
taken into account in this box by specifying the time offset.
● NTP Server IP Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the NTP server.
● NTP Server Port
Enter the port of the NTP server.
The following ports are possible:
– 123 (standard port)
– 1025 to 36564
● Poll Interval(s)
Here, enter the interval between two-time queries. In this box, you enter the query interval
in seconds. Possible values are 64 to 1024 seconds.
Procedure
1. Click the "NTP Client" check box to enable the automatic time setting using NTP.
2. Enter the necessary values in the following boxes:
– Time zone
– IP address or FQDN name of the NTP server
– NTP server port
– Query interval
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
176
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.12.6
SIMATIC Time Client
Time setting via SIMATIC time client
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● SIMATIC Time Client
Select this check box to enable the device as a SIMATIC time client.
● Current System Time
This box displays the current system time.
● Last Synchronization Time
This box is read-only and shows when the last time-of-day synchronization took place.
● Last Synchronization Mechanism
This box displays how the last time-of-day synchronization was performed. The following
methods are possible:
– Not set
The system time was not set.
– Manual
Manual time setting
– SNTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with SNTP
– NTP
Automatic time-of-day synchronization with NTP
– SIMATIC
Automatic time-of-day synchronization using the SIMATIC time frame
Procedure
1. Click the "SIMATIC Time Client" check box to enable the SIMATIC Time Client.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
177
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.13
Auto Logout
Setting the automatic logout
On this page, set the times after which there is an automatic logout from WBM or the CLI
following user in activity.
If you have been logged out automatically, you will need to log in again.
Note
No automatic logout from the CLI
If the connection is not terminated after the set time, check the setting of the "keepalive"
function on the Telnet client. If the set time interval is less than the configured time, the lower
value applies. For example, you have set 300 seconds for the automatic logout and 120
seconds is set for the "keepalive" function. In this case, a packet is sent every 120 seconds
that keeps the connection up.
Procedure
1. Enter a value of 60-3600 seconds in the "Web Base Management (s)" input box. If you
enter the value 0, the automatic logout is disabled.
2. Enter a value of 60-600 seconds in the "CLI (TELNET, SSH) (s)" input box. If you enter
the value 0, the automatic logout is disabled.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
178
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.14
Syslog Client
System event agent
Syslog according to RFC 3164 is used for transferring short, unencrypted text messages
over UDP in the IP network. This requires a Syslog server.
Requirements for sending log entries:
● The Syslog function is enabled on the device.
● The Syslog function is enabled for the relevant event.
● There is a Syslog server in your network that receives the log entries. (Since this is a
UDP connection, there is no acknowledgment to the sender)
● The IP address or the FQDN name of the Syslog server is entered on the device.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Syslog Client
Enable or disable the Syslog function.
● Server IP Address
Enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the Syslog server.
This table contains the following columns
● Select
Select the row you want to delete.
● Server Address
Shows the IP address or the FQDN name of the Syslog server.
● Server Port
Enter the port of the Syslog server being used.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
179
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
Enabling function
1. Select the "Syslog Client" check box.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Creating a new entry
1. In the "Server IP Address" input box, enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the
Syslog server on which the log entries will be saved.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new row is inserted in the table.
3. In the "Server Port" input box, enter the number of the UDP port of the server.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
The default setting of the server port is 514.
Changing the entry
1. Delete the entry.
2. Create a new entry.
Deleting an entry
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button. All selected entries are deleted and the display is refreshed.
5.5.15
Fault Monitoring
5.5.15.1
Power Supply
Settings for monitoring the power supply
Configure whether or not the power supply should be monitored by the messaging system.
Depending on the hardware variant there are one or two power connectors (Line 1 / Line 2)
and a PoE power supply. With a redundant power supply, configure the monitoring
separately for each individual feed-in line.
A fault is then signaled by the message system when there is no power on a monitored line
(Line 1, Line 2 or PoE) or when the applied voltage is too low.
Note
You will find the permitted operating voltage limits in the operating instructions of the device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
180
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
A fault causes the signaling contact to trigger and the fault LED on the device to light up and,
depending on the configuration, can trigger a trap, an e-mail, or an entry in the event log
table.
Note
This WBM page is not available on the SCALANCE W786-2 SFP.
Procedure
1. Click the check box in front of the line name you want to monitor to enable or disable the
monitoring function.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Monitoring of the redundant power supply by PNIO
With the following devices, you can also configure which power supply will be monitored by
PNIO:
● SCALANCE W788-x (RJ-45 variants)
● SCALANCE W748-1 RJ-45
● SCALANCE W774-1 (RJ-45 and M12 variant)
● SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
181
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Procedure
1. Select the required entry from the drop-down list.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.15.2
Link Change
Configuration of fault monitoring of status changes on connections
On this page, you configure whether or not an error message is triggered if there is a status
change on a network connection.
If connection monitoring is enabled, an error is signaled
● when there should be a link on a port and this is missing.
● or when there should not be a link on a port and a link is detected.
A fault causes the signaling contact to trigger and the fault LED on the device to light up and,
depending on the configuration, can trigger a trap, an e-mail, or an entry in the event log
table.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
182
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the available ports.
● Setting
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following options:
– Up
Error handling is triggered when the port changes to the active status.
(From "Link down" to "Link up")
– Down
Error handling is triggered when the port changes to the inactive status.
(From "Link up" to "Link down")
– "-" (disabled)
The error handling is not triggered.
Procedure
1. From the relevant drop-down list, select the options of the slots / ports whose connection
status you want to monitor.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.16
PNIO
Settings for PROFINET IO
This page shows the PROFINET IO AR status and the device name.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
183
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description of the displayed boxes
The page contains the following boxes:
● PNIO AR Status
This box shows the status of the PROFINET IO connection; in other words whether the
device is connected to a PROFINET IO controller "Online " or "Offline".
Here, online means that a connection to a PROFINET IO controller exists, that this has
downloaded its configuration data to the device and that the device can send status data
to the PROFINET IO controller. In this status known as "in data exchange", the
parameters set with the PROFINET IO controller cannot be configured.
● PNIO Name of Station
This box displays the PROFINET IO device name according to the configuration in HW
Config of STEP 7.
Note
Devices with two Ethernet ports
With devices that have two Ethernet ports, only port P1 should be used for the PNIO
configuration because LLPD frames can only be sent and received via port 1. They are
blocked at port 2 and are also not forwarded between the ports. This applies to the following
devices:
• SCALANCE W786-2 SFP
• SCALANCE W774-1 RJ-45
• SCALANCE W774-1 M12 EEC
• SCALANCE W734-1 RJ-45
SCALANCE W700 and STEP 7
The Ethernet interface can be configured in STEP 7 if the following requirements are met:
● STEP 7 V13 Update 3 with HSP0107 or
● STEP7 version 5.5.4 with GSDML version 2.31
The diagnostics functions can also be used. The WLAN interface cannot be configured with
STEP 7.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
184
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
PNIO for client devices
If a client is to be used as a PNIO device, the MAC address of the client must be specified as
follows (MAC Mode):
● Own
In the network beyond the device, only IP communication and no PNIO is possible.
● Layer 2 Tunnel
The client and the devices downstream from it can be used as PNIO devices.
Note
If "Automatic" or "Manual" is configured as the MAC mode for a client, this device cannot
be used as a PNIO device.
5.5.17
PLUG
5.5.17.1
Configuration
NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG during operation!
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether or not a PLUG is present at one second intervals. If it is
detected that the PLUG was removed, there is a restart. If a valid KEY-PLUG was inserted
in the device, the device changes to a defined error state following the restart. With
SCALANCE W, the available wireless interfaces are deactivated in this case.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory
settings.
Information about the configuration of the C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG
This page provides detailed information about the configuration stored on the C-PLUG or
KEY-PLUG. It is also possible to reset the PLUG to "factory defaults" or to load it with new
contents.
Note
The action is only executed after you click the "Set Values" button.
The action cannot be undone.
If you decide against executing the function after making your selection, click the "Refresh"
button. As a result the data of this page is read from the device again and the selection is
canceled.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
185
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Note
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed. In this
situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has the status "Not
Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous more up-to-date
firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date firmware without any
loss of configuration data.
If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or
rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
186
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
The table has the following rows:
● State
Shows the status of the PLUG. The following are possible:
– ACCEPTED
There is a PLUG with a valid and suitable configuration in the device.
– NOT ACCEPTED
Invalid or incompatible configuration on the inserted PLUG.
– NOT PRESENT
There is no C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG inserted in the device.
– FACTORY
PLUG is inserted and does not contain a configuration. This status is also displayed
when the PLUG was formatted during operation.
– MISSING
There is no PLUG inserted. Functions are configured on the device for which a license
is required.
● Device Group
Shows the SIMATIC NET product line that used the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG previously.
● Device Type
Shows the device type within the product line that used the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG
previously.
● Configuration Revision
The version of the configuration structure. This information relates to the configuration
options supported by the device and has nothing to do with the concrete hardware
configuration. This revision information does not therefore change if you add or remove
additional components (modules or extenders), it can, however, change if you update the
firmware.
● File System
Displays the type of file system on the PLUG.
NOTICE
New file system UBI
As of SCALANCE W firmware version 2.0 and SCALANCE X500 firmware version 3.0,
UBI is the standard file system for the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG. If a C-PLUG with the
previous file system IECP is detected in such a device, this C-PLUG will be formatted
for the UBI file system and the data will be rewritten to the C-PLUG.
This change in the file system also occurs following a firmware update to V2.0 with
SCALANCE W or to V3.0 with SCALANCE X500. A downgrade to the previous version
of the firmware then presents a problem. The firmware can neither read nor write the CPLUG or KEY-PLUG and it is not even possible to "Erase PLUG to Factory Default".
● File System Size [Byte]
Displays the maximum storage capacity of the file system on the PLUG.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
187
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
● File System Usage [Byte]
Displays the memory utilization of the file system of the PLUG.
● Info String
Shows additional information about the device that used the PLUG previously, for
example, order number, type designation, and the versions of the hardware and software.
The displayed software version corresponds to the version in which the configuration was
last changed. With the "NOT ACCEPTED" status, further information on the cause of the
problem is displayed.
● "Modify PLUG" drop-down list
Select the setting from the drop-down list. You have the following options for changing
the configuration on the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG:
– Write current configuration to PLUG
This option is available only if the status of the PLUG is "NOT ACCEPTED" or
"FACTORY".
The configuration in the internal flash memory of the device is copied to the PLUG.
– Erase PLUG to factory default
Deletes all the data from the PLUG and runs a low-level formatting function.
Procedure
1. You can only make settings in this box if you are logged on as "Administrator". Here, you
decide how you want to change the content of the PLUG.
2. Select the required option from the "Modify PLUG" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.5.17.2
License
NOTICE
Do not remove or insert a C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG during operation!
A PLUG may only be removed or inserted when the device is turned off.
The device checks whether or not a PLUG is present at one second intervals. If it is
detected that the PLUG was removed, there is a restart. If a valid KEY-PLUG was inserted
in the device, the device changes to a defined error state following the restart. With
SCALANCE W, the available wireless interfaces are deactivated in this case.
If the device was configured at some time with a PLUG, the device can no longer be used
without this PLUG. To be able to use the device again, reset the device to the factory
settings.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
188
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Note
Incompatibility with previous versions with PLUG inserted
During the installation of a previous version, the configuration data can be lost. In this case,
the device starts up with the factory settings after the firmware has been installed. In this
situation, if a PLUG is inserted in the device, following the restart, this has the status "Not
Accepted" since the PLUG still has the configuration data of the previous more up-to-date
firmware. This allows you to return to the previous, more up-to-date firmware without any
loss of configuration data.
If the original configuration on the PLUG is no longer required, the PLUG can be deleted or
rewritten manually using "System > PLUG".
Information about the license of the KEY-PLUG
A C-PLUG can only store the configuration of a device. In addition to the configuration, a
KEY-PLUG also contains a license that enables certain functions of your SIMATIC NET
device.
This page provides detailed information about the license on the KEY-PLUG. In this
example, the KEY-PLUG contains the data for enabling the layer 3 functions of the device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
189
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
Description
● State
Shows the status of the KEY-PLUG. The following are possible:
– ACCEPTED
The KEY-PLUG in the device contains a suitable and valid license.
– NOT ACCEPTED
The license of the inserted KEY-PLUG is not valid.
– NOT PRESENT
No KEY-PLUG is inserted in the device.
– MISSING
There is no KEY-PLUG or a C-PLUG with the status "FACTORY" inserted in the
device. Functions are configured on the device for which a license is required.
– WRONG
The inserted KEY-PLUG is not suitable for the device.
– UNKNOWN
Unknown content of the KEY-PLUG.
– DEFECTIVE
The content of the KEY-PLUG contains errors.
● Order ID
Shows the order number of the KEY-PLUG. The KEY-PLUG is available for various
functional enhancements and for various target systems.
● Serial Number
Shows the serial number of the KEY-PLUG.
● Info String
Shows additional information about the device that used the KEY-PLUG previously, for
example, order number, type designation, and the versions of the hardware and software.
The displayed software version corresponds to the version in which the configuration was
last changed. With the "NOT ACCEPTED" status, further information on the cause of the
problem is displayed.
Note
When you save the configuration, the information about whether or not a KEY-PLUG was
inserted in the device at the time is also saved. This configuration can then only work if a
KEY-PLUG with the same order number / license is inserted. This applies regardless of
whether or not iFeatures are configured.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
190
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.5 "System" menu
5.5.18
Ping
Reachability of an address in an IP network
With the ping function, you can check whether a certain IP address is reachable in the
network.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● "IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address of the device.
● "Repeat" input box
Enter the number of ping requests.
● "Ping" button
Click this button to start the ping function.
● Ping Output
This box shows the output of the ping function.
● "Clear" button
Click this button to empty the "Ping Output" box.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
191
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6
"Interfaces" menu
5.6.1
Ethernet
5.6.1.1
Overview
Overview of the port configuration
The page shows the configuration for the data transfer for all ports of the device. You cannot
configure anything on this page.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the configurable ports. If you click on the link, the corresponding configuration
page is opened.
● Port Name
Shows the name of the port.
● Status
Shows whether the port is on or off. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled port.
● Link
Shows the connection status to the network. With the connection status, the following is
possible:
– Up
The port has a valid link to the network, a link integrity signal is being received.
– Down
The link is down, for example because the connected device is turned off.
● Mode
Shows the transfer parameters of the port.
● MTU (Maximum Transmission Unit)
Shows the packet size.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
192
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Negotiation
Shows whether the automatic configuration is enabled or disabled.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the port.
5.6.1.2
Configuration
Configuring ports
With this page, you configure the Ethernet ports of the device.
Note
The two Ethernet ports of a SCALANCE W770/W730 cannot be assigned parameters or
diagnosed individually.
Description
The table has the following rows:
● "Port" drop-down list
Select the port to be configured from the drop-down list.
● "Status" drop-down list
Specify whether the port is enabled or disabled.
– enabled
The port is enabled. Data traffic is possible only over an enabled port.
– disabled
The port is disabled.
● Input box "Port Name"
Here, enter a name for the port.
● MAC Address
Shows the MAC address of the port.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
193
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● "Mode Type" drop-down list
Note
This parameter cannot be configured for the SCALANCE W770/W730 devices. The value
is preset to "Autonegotiation" for both ports.
● Mode
Shows the transmission speed and the transmission method of the port.
● Negotiation
Shows whether the automatic configuration of the connection to the partner port is
enabled or disabled.
● "MTU" input box
Enter the packet size above which packets are fragmented.
● Link
Shows the connection status to the network. The available options are as follows:
– Up
The port has a valid link to the network, a link integrity signal is being received.
– Down
The link is down, for example because the connected device is turned off.
Changing the port configuration
Click the appropriate box to change the configuration.
Note
With various automatic functions, the device prevents or reduces the effect on other ports
and priority classes (Class of Service) if a port is overloaded. This can mean that frames are
discarded even when flow control is enabled.
Port overload occurs when the device receives more frames than it can send, for example as
the result of different transmission speeds.
Procedure
Follow the steps below to change the settings:
1. Change the settings according to your configuration.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
194
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2
WLAN
5.6.2.1
Basic
Basic settings
On this page, you make several basic settings for the device, for example the country setting
and mode.
Note
To configure the WLAN interface you must always specify the Country Code first. Some
parameters are dependent on the country setting, for example the transmission standard.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
195
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Description
● "Country Code" drop-down list
From this list, you select the country in which the device will be operated.
You do not need to know the data for the specific country, the channel division and output
power are set by the device according to the country you select.
Note
Locale setting
The correct country setting is mandatory for operation complying with the approvals.
Selecting a country different from the country of use can lead to legal prosecution.
● "Device Mode" drop-down list
Select the mode of the device. This selection is available only for access points.
The following operating modes are possible:
– AP: Access point mode
– Client: Client mode
Note
After changing the mode, a message is displayed. If you confirm the message with
"OK", the device restarts in the changed mode with the factory-set configuration
settings.
If you have restarted the device after changing the mode, you will need to log on again to
be able to continue the configuration.
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Enabled
Status of the WLAN interface. To enable the WLAN interface, select the check box.
Note
Enabling the WLAN interface
The WLAN interfaces are disabled when the device is supplied. The WLAN interfaces are
can be enabled once the country and the antenna settings are configured.
● Radio Mode
Shows the mode of the WLAN interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
196
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Frequency Band
Specify the frequency band. In client mode, dual-frequency operation is also possible.
Note
Configuring WLAN interfaces of the W786-2IA RJ-45 for different frequency bands
If both WLAN interfaces are configured for the same frequency band on this device, there
may be mutual influence or interference. This applies in particular when there is a high
data throughput.
● WLAN Mode
Select the required transmission standard for the configured frequency band.
– WLAN Mode 2.4 GHz
Specify the transmission standard for the 2.4 GHz frequency band. The selection
depends on the country setting.
– WLAN Mode 5 GHz
Specify the transmission standard for the 5 GHz frequency band. The selection
depends on the country setting.
● DFS (802.11h)
Enables or disables the "Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS)" function.
– Enabled
If the access point discovers a disruption on the current channel, for example due to a
primary user, it automatically switches to an alternative channel. DFS is also the
requirement for the use of certain wireless channels.
– Disabled
The DFS function is not used.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
197
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Outdoor Mode
– Enabled
In outdoor mode, the selection of country-dependent channels and the transmit power
for operation are extended for outdoor use.
– Disabled
The device is being operated in indoor mode. In indoor mode, the selection of countrydependent channels and the transmit power for operation in a building are restricted.
● max. Tx Power
Specify the maximum possible transmit power of the device. It may be necessary to
reduce the transmit power depending on the antennas being used to avoid exceeding the
maximum legal transmit power. Reducing the transmit power effectively reduces cell size.
Note
The maximum possible transmit power varies depending on the channel and data rate.
For more detailed information on transmit power, refer to the documentation
"Characteristics radio interface".
Note
If both interfaces of access points with two WLAN interfaces are operated in the same
frequency range, this may cause wireless interference on one or both interfaces at a
transmit power higher than 15 dBm.
● Tx Power Check
Indicates whether the settings that have been made will violate the permitted transmit
power restrictions of the selected country. The following parameters influence this
calculation:
max. Tx Power, Antenna Gain, Additional Attenuation.
The following displays can appear:
– Allowed
The channels can be used with the current settings.
– Not allowed (Some Channels)
Among the channels, there are some on which the current transmit power exceeds the
maximum permitted transmit power.
– Not allowed (All Channels)
No permitted operation is possible. The transmit power is too high.
Procedure
1. To configure the WLAN interface, you must always specify the country first. Select the
country in which the device will be operated from the Country Code drop-down list.
2. Select the required frequency band from the "Frequency Band" drop-down list.
3. Select the required transmission standard for the configured frequency band from the
"WLAN Mode" drop-down list.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
198
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2.2
Advanced
Further possible settings
On this page, you can specify details of the transmission characteristics. You only need to
adapt the parameters on this page if the device cannot be used as it is intended with the
default settings.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Beacon Interval [ms] (Only in access point mode)
Specify the interval (40 - 1000 ms) at which the access point sends beacons. Beacons
are packets that are sent cyclically by an access point to inform clients of its existence.
● DTIM (Only in access point mode)
The DTIM interval (1-15) specifies the number of beacons to be sent before the access
point sends the collected packets (broadcast, unicast, multicast) to the client.
– If you enter a "1" in this box, the access point transmits broadcast, unicast and
multicast packets directly after each beacon (recommended setting for normal network
environments).
– If you entered a "5" in this field, this would mean that the access point collects the
packets and sends them after every fifth beacon.
Increasing this value allows a longer sleep mode for the clients but means a greater delay
for packets.
● RTS/CTS Threshold [Bytes]
RTS/CTS (Request To Send/Clear To Send) is a method for avoiding collisions. The
method is based on the exchange of status information prior to sending the actual data
(hidden node problem). To minimize the network load due to additional protocol traffic,
this method is used only as of a specified packet size. You specify the packet size with
the "RTS/CTS Threshold" parameter.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
199
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Fragmentation Length Threshold [Bytes]
Specify the maximum packet size transferred on the wireless link. Large packets are
divided up into small packets prior to transmission and then reassembled into the original
size after they have been received. This can be beneficial if the transmission quality is
poor because larger packets are more difficult to transmit. However fragmentation into
smaller packets means a poorer throughput.
● HW Retries
Specify the number of hardware retries. The hardware repetition is performed by the
WLAN chip itself when it tries to repeat an unacknowledged packet immediately.
If all hardware repetitions were unsuccessful, the packet is deleted.
● Force roaming on link down (Only in access point mode)
If the wired Ethernet interface is no longer available (cable break, connector removed), a
client connected over the wireless network is not aware of this. The access point can
force the logged-on clients to roam by deactivating its WLAN interface. The client then
attempts to log on at a different access point. You enable this feature by selecting the
"Force Roaming on link down" check box.
Procedure
1. Enter the values to be set in the input boxes as follows.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
200
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2.3
Antennas
Overview
Overview of IWLAN antennas:
The antenna name provides information about the properties of the antennas listed in the
IWLAN antenna overview:
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
201
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Antennas
Configuration of external antennas
On this page, you configure the settings for the connected external antennas.
Note
50 Ω terminating resistor
Each WLAN interface has up to two antenna connectors. Connectors that are not used must
have a 50 Ω terminating resistor fitted.
The antenna R1A1 must be always be connected as soon as the associated WLAN Interface
is turned on. If no antenna is connected, the relevant interface must also be disabled for Rx
and Tx. Otherwise, there may be transmission disruptions.
Description of the displayed boxes
The table has the following columns:
● Connector
Shows the name of the relevant antenna connector.
● Antenna Type
Select the type of external antenna connected to the device. If the type of your external
antenna is not available, select the entry "User defined"
.If you terminate an antenna connection using a 50 Ω terminating resistor, select the entry
"Not used (connect 50 Ohms Termination)".
● Antenna Gain
If you select the "User defined" entry for the "Antenna Type", enter the antenna gain
manually in the "dBi" unit.
– Antenna Gain 2.4 GHz [dBi]
Here, enter the antenna gain that the antenna has in the 2.4 GHz frequency band.
– Antenna Gain 5 GHz [dBi]
Here, enter the antenna gain that the antenna has in the 5 GHz frequency band.
● Cable Length [m]
Enter the length of the flexible antenna connecting cable in meters between the device
and the external antenna.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
202
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Additional Attenuation [dB]
Here, specify the additional attenuation caused, for example, by an additional splitter.
● Antenna Mode
Specify the use of the antenna. For antenna connector 1 (R1 A1 and R2 A1), the entry
cannot be changed.
– Tx
For sending only
– Rx
For receiving only
– Rx\Tx
For receiving and sending
The following table shows which combinations are possible:
R1 A1
R2 A1
R1 A2
R2 A2
Rx\Tx
Rx\Tx
Rx\Tx
Rx
Rx\Tx
Tx
Rx\Tx
-- 1)
1) Antenna type "50 Ohms Termination Impedance"
Steps in configuration
To configure one or more antennas, follow the steps below:
1. For the first antenna connector (R1 A1) in the "Antenna Type" drop-down list, select the
type of antenna.
2. In the "Cable Length" input box, enter the length of the connecting cable you are using in
meters. For antenna connector 1 (R1 A1 and R2 A1), the "Antenna Mode" cannot be
changed.
3. For further antenna connectors (e.g. R1 A2), select the type of antenna from the
"Antenna Type" drop-down list.
4. In the "Cable Length" input box, enter the length of the connecting cable you are using in
meters.
5. Select the use of the antenna from the "Antenna Mode" drop-down list.
6. Repeat steps 3 to 5 for further antenna connectors.
7. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
203
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2.4
Allowed Channels
Channel settings
For communication, a specific channel within a frequency band is used. You can either set
this channel specifically or configure so that the channel is selected automatically.
On this page, you specify which channels may be used for communication.
Description
Table 1 contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Use Allowed Channels only
If you enable the option, you restrict the selection of channels via which the AP or the
client is allowed to establish the connection.
In the following tables, you define the
– channels that the AP can use to establish a wireless cell when the "Auto" channel
setting is enabled.
– the channels on which the client searches for an AP.
The tables are divided up according to frequency bands.
If the option is disabled, the channels available based on the settings (country code,
antennas, transmit power etc.) are used.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
204
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Above the tables for the frequency bands, you will find the following check box:
● Select / Deselect all
– Enabled
If you enable the check box, all channels are selected.
– Disabled
If you deselect the check box, the first valid channel of the frequency band remains
enabled. Enable the required channel.
The tables of the frequency bands have the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Radio Mode
Shows the mode.
● Kanalnummer
To specify the valid channels for the required frequency band, select the appropriate
check box for the channel number.
The table displays the permitted channels of the country. Only the valid channels can be
enabled. Invalid channels are grayed out and cannot be enabled.
Note
To specify the channels, the setting "Use Allowed Channels only" must be enabled.
Procedure
1. Enable the "Used Allowed Channels only" option for the required WLAN interface.
2. Deselect the "Select / Deselect all" check box.
3. Select the relevant check box for the required channel number.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
205
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2.5
802.11n
Properties of 802.11n
With the IEEE 802.11n standard, it is possible to put together individual data packets in one
larger data packet, the A-MPDU data packet. This achieves a higher data throughput.
On this page, you make the settings for the A-MPDU data packets. Some of the settings
depend on the set transmission standard and the selected channel width.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● A-MPDU
Enables or disables the sending of A-MPDU data packets. If this check box is disabled,
only A-MPDU data packets are received.
● A-MPDU Limit [Frames]
Specify the number of individual data packets grouped together in one AMPDU data
packet.
Range of values: 2 - 64 frames
● A-MPDU Limit [Bytes]
Specify the maximum size of the AMPDU data packet. Range of values: 1024 - 65535
bytes
● Guard Interval [ns](Only in access point mode)
Select the send pause that must be kept to between two transmitted OFDM symbols.
The following settings are possible. The selection depends on the selected transmission
standard.
– 400 (short): The send pause is 400 ns
– 800 (long): The send pause is 800 ns.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
206
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Procedure
Configure 802.11n settings on the access point
1. Enable the "A-MPDU" option.
2. Enter the required values in the "A-MPDU Limit [Frames]" and "A-MPDU Limit [Bytes]"
input boxes.
3. Select the required value from the "Guard Interval [ns]" drop-down list.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
Configure 802.11n settings on the client
1. Enable the "A-MPDU" option.
2. Enter the required values in the "A-MPDU Limit [Frames]" and "A-MPDU Limit [Bytes]"
input boxes.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.2.6
AP
Configuration
On this page, you specify the configuration for the access point.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
207
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Channel
Specify the main channel.
If you want the access point to search for a free channel itself, use "Auto". The selection
of channels used by an access point when establishing a wireless cell can be restricted.
To do this, select the "Use Allowed Channels only" check box on the "Allowed Channels"
tab.
".If you want to use a fixed channel, select the required channel from the drop-down list.
Note
Channel spacing with WLAN interfaces
If you use a second WLAN interface, make sure that you have adequate channel
spacing.
● Alternative DFS Channel
If you have enabled the "DFS" function, on the "Basic" page, specify the alternative
channel here. If you want the access point to search for a free channel itself, use "Auto".
If a primary user was detected both on the main and alternative channel, the access point
automatically searches for a free channel.
If you want to use a fixed channel, select the required channel from the drop-down list.
● HT Channel Width [MHz]
You can specify the channel bandwidth only with the IEEE 802.11n transmission
standard.
The following settings are possible.
– 20
Channel bandwidth 20 MHz
– 40 up
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
above it are used.
– 40 down
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz. The configured channel and the neighboring channel
below it are used.
Note
Channel bandwidth 40 MHz and frequency band 2.4 GHz
If the access point detects another access point on the configured channel or on
neighboring channels, the access point changes the channel bandwidth from 40 MHz
to 20 MHz. If you set a "free" channel on the access point, the access point uses the
channel bandwidth 40 MHz.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
208
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Available Channels
This box displays the permitted channels. The display depends on the wireless approvals
of the currently selected country and the settings for "Allowed Channels".
Table 3 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
● Port
Shows the VAP interface.
● Enabled
To use the required VAP interface, select this check box.
● SSID
Enter the SSID of the WLAN. The length of the character string for SSID it is 1 to 32
characters.
The ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used for the SSID.
● Broadcast SSID
– disabled
The SSID is no longer sent in the beacon frame of the access point. This means that
the SSID is not visible for other devices. Only clients that know the SSID of the access
point and that are configured with it can connect to the access point. The "Any SSID"
option must be disabled on these clients.
– enabled
The SSID is sent in the Beacon frame of the access point and is visible for other
devices. This means that clients on which the "Any SSID" option is enabled can also
connect to the access point.
Note
Since no encryption is used for the SSID transfer, this function can only provide basic
protection against unauthorized access. The use of an authentication method (for
example WPA2 (RADIUS) or WPA2-PSK if this is not possible) provides higher security.
You must also expect that certain end devices may have problems with access to a
hidden SSID.
● WDS only
If you enable this option, the access point only supports communication via WDS. In
WDS mode, all access points must use the same channel.
● WDS ID
Enter the WDS ID. The WDS ID can be a maximum of 32 characters long.
To establish a WDS connection, enter this WDS ID on the WDS Partner.
ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used for the WDS ID.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
209
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Procedure
1. Select the required channel from the "Channel" drop-down list.
2. Enter network name in the "SSID" input box for the corresponding WLAN interface and
port.
3. Select the "Enabled" check box for the relevant WLAN interface and the port.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.2.7
AP WDS
Communication between access points
In normal operation, the access point is used as an interface to a network and communicates
with clients. There are, however, situations in which several access points need to
communicate with each other, for example to extend wireless coverage or to set up a
wireless backbone. This mode is possible with WDS (Wireless Distributed System).
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● Port
Shows the port.
● Port enabeld
Enables the WDS interface.
● Connection over
Specify the VAP interface via which the WDS connection is established. Both the MAC
address of the VAP as well as security settings (for example WPA2) are used.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
210
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Partner ID Type
Specify the type of WDS communication.
– MAC Address
The MAC address is used. The "Partner WDS ID" input box is grayed out. In "Partner
MAC", enter the MAC address of the WDS partner.
– WDS ID
The WDS ID is used. The "Partner MAC" input box is grayed out. In "Partner WDS
ID", enter the WDS ID of the WDS partner. Use this option if you want to replace the
access point later using the C-PLUG or KEY-PLUG.
● Partner MAC
Enter the MAC address of the WDS partner.
● Partner WDS ID
Enter the WDS ID of the WDS partner.
For the WDS ID, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
Note
Matching security settings in WDS mode
In WDS mode, make sure that the security settings match up for all devices involved. If
settings are incorrect or not compatible on the individual devices, no data exchange is
possible due to incorrect authentication. Avoid the "Auto" setting in the "Security Settings"
tab of the Basic Wizard, because with this setting, synchronization of the security settings
between the access points is not possible.
Note
In WDS operation, the following restrictions apply to all access points involved:
• All access points that will communicate with each other must use the same channel, the
same transmission procedure and the same data rate.
• You can select either WEP or WPA(2)-PSK as the encryption method.
You configure the security settings in the assigned VAP interface: "Security > WLAN >
Basic"
You cannot use authentication with a RADIUS server for a WDS connection.
• In the IEEE 802.11h transmission mode, it is not practical to select the WDS mode. In
WDS mode, all access points must use the same channel. If a signal from a primary user
is detected by an access point, the channel is changed automatically and the existing
connection is then terminated.
Procedure
1. Select the required VAP interface from the "Connection over"drop-down list.
2. Select the entry "WDS ID" from the "Partner ID Type"drop-down list.
3. In the "WDS ID" input box, enter the WDS ID of the WDS partner. The "Partner MAC"
input box is grayed out.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
211
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2.8
AP 802.11a/b/g Rates
Data transmission speeds with IEEE 802.11a/b/g
Note
The tab is available only in access point mode.
The WBM page can only be configured if "802.11a", "802.11g" or "802.11n" is set for WLAN
Mode.
The WBM page shows the available data transmission speeds for the WLAN mode
802.11a/b/g. If necessary, you can change the data transmission speeds. Otherwise, we
recommend that you retain the default setting for data transmission speeds. The access
point will then use only the selected data transmission speeds for communication with the
clients.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
212
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the information relates.
● Use selected data rates only
If you enable this option, you can specify the data transmission speeds for the required
WLAN interface.
If this option is disabled, the default values are used. As default, this option is disabled.
"Radio" drop-down list
In this drop-down list, select the WLAN interfaces displayed in Table 3 (Data Rate).
With Table 2, you can enable or disable all check boxes of a column of Table 3 (Data Rate)
at once. Table 2 has the following columns:
● All data rates settings
Shows that the setting is valid for all entries of Table 3.
● Enabled / Basic
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all entries. If "No Change" is selected, the entry
in Table 3 remains unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all entries of Table 3.
Table 3 (Data Rate) consists of the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the information relates.
● Data Rate [Mbps]
Shows the supported data transmission speeds in megabits per second.
● Enabled
Enable the option to assign the required data transmission speed to the WLAN interface.
Note
You need to enable at least one data transmission speed.
● Basic
Enable the option to declare the required data transmission speed as "Basic". The "Basic"
parameter specifies that a client must be capable of this speed to be able to connect to
the Access Point. The "Basic" option can only be enabled if an available data
transmission speed has been selected.
Note
At least one data transmission speed needs to be specified as "Basic".
"Default Values" button
The "Default Values" button sets the selection of the values in compliance with the standard.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
213
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Procedure
To configure a certain data transmission speed on WLAN 1:
1. Enable the "Use selected data rates only" option for "WLAN 1".
2. From the "Radio" drop-down list, select the entry "WLAN 1".
3. Select the check box for the required data transmission speed in the "Enabled" and in the
"Basic" column.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
To reset the selection:
1. Click the "Default Values" button. The selection is reset to the default setting.
5.6.2.9
AP 802.11n Rates
Data transmission speeds in IEEE 802.11n
Note
The tab is available only in access point mode.
The WBM page can only be configured if "802.11n only" or "802.11n" is set for the WLAN
mode.
The WBM page shows the available data transmission speeds (MCS = Modulation and
Coding Schemes) for the WLAN mode 802.11n. You can select any combination of these
data transmission speeds. The access point will then use only the selected data
transmission speeds for communication with the clients.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
214
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the information relates.
● Use selected data rates only
If you select this option, you can specify the data transmission speeds for the required
WLAN interface.
If this option is disabled, the default values are used. As default, this option is disabled.
Drop-down list "Radio"
In this drop-down list, select the WLAN interfaces displayed in Table 3 (MCS Index).
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
215
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
With Table 2, you can enable or disable all check boxes of a column of Table 3 (MCS Index)
at once. Table 2 has the following columns:
● All data rates settings
Shows that the setting is valid for all entries in Table 3.
● Enabled
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all entries. If "No Change" is selected, the entry
in table 3 remains unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all entries of table 3.
Table 3 (MCS Index) consists of the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the information relates.
● MCS Index
Shows the supported MCS indexes. The displayed MCS indexes depend on the settings
"Antenna Type" and "Antenna Mode". You will find the settings in "Interfaces > WLAN >
Antennas". If, for example, you only use one antenna, only the MCS 0 to 7 are displayed.
● Streams
Shows the maximum possible number of parallel data streams that can be transmitted
with the selected MCS index.
● Data Rate [Mbps]
Shows the supported data transmission speeds in megabits per second. The displayed
data transmission speeds depend on the settings "Guard Interval" and "HT Channel
Width". The "HT Channel Width" setting can be found in "Interfaces > WLAN > AP". The
"Guard Interval" setting can be found in "Interfaces > WLAN > 802.11n"
● Enabled
Enable the option to assign the required data transmission speed to the WLAN interface.
Note
You need to enable at least one MCS index.
Button "Default Values"
The "Default Values" button sets the selection of the values in compliance with the standard.
Procedure
To configure a certain data transmission speed on WLAN 1:
1. For "WLAN 1", select the option "Use selected data rates only".
2. From the "Radio" drop-down list, select the entry "WLAN 1".
3. Select the corresponding check box in the "Enabled" column for the selected MCS index.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
216
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
To reset the selection:
1. Click the "Default Values" button. The selection is reset to the default setting.
Or
1. Disable the "Use selected data rates only" option in Table 1.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.6.2.10
Client
Connecting to a network
With this menu command, you can specify how the device connects to a network as client.
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
217
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces in this column.
● MAC Mode
Specify how a MAC address is assigned to the client. The following are possible:
– Automatic
The client automatically adopts the source MAC address of the first frame that it
receives over the Ethernet interface.
– Manual
If you select Manual, enter the MAC address in the "MAC Address" column.
– Own
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
– Layer 2 Tunnel
The client uses the MAC address of the Ethernet interface for the WLAN interface.
The network is also informed of the MAC addresses connected to the Ethernet
interface of the client. Up to eight MAC addresses can be used.
● MAC Address
If you have selected "Manual" for "MAC Mode", enter the MAC address of the client.
● Any SSID
– Enabled
In client mode, the access point attempts to connect to the network with the best
transmission quality and that has suitable security settings. The clients can only
connect to the access point on which the "Broadcast SSID" option is enabled.
– Disabled
The client attempts to connect to the access point from the SSID list that provides the
best transmission quality and on which the "Broadcast SSID" option is disabled.
● Roaming Threshold
Specify the threshold after which the client roams to the new access point.
– High
Changes only at a significantly higher field strength to the AP with the stronger signal.
– Medium
Changes at a moderately higher field strength to the AP with the stronger signal.
– Low
Changes at a slightly higher field strength to the AP with the stronger signal.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
218
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Background Scan Mode
While the client is connected to an access point, it scans for other access points in the
background with which it can connect when necessary. Specify the mode for the scan.
The following options are available:
– always
The client scans continuously for access points.
– idle
If there is no data traffic for a certain time, a scan is started for further access points.
– disabled
As long as the client is connected, there is no scan for further access points.
● Background Scan Interval [ms]
Specify the interval at which further access points are scanned.
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
● Scan channels
Shows the channels on which the client searches for an access point. The display
depends on the wireless approvals of the selected country and the settings for "Allowed
Channels".
Table 3 has the following columns:
● Enabled
Enables or disables the relevant SSID.
● Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
● SSID
Enter the SSID of the access point with which the client will connect.
For the SSID, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
Procedure
1. From the "MAC Mode" drop-down list, select the required assignment of the MAC
address.
2. In table 2, enter an SSID for "SSID" and enable the required SSID.
3. Disable the "Any SSID" function.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
219
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
5.6.2.11
Signal Recorder
Recording the signal strength
The signal recorder displays or records the received signal strength of the connected access
point. Using this data, you can locate areas with an inadequate signal strength. The signal
recorder can be particularly useful when the client moves along a fixed path.
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode. The WLAN interface of the device must be
enabled, otherwise no recording is possible.
Description
This table contains the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the WLAN interface to which the information applies. Since a client has a WLAN
interface, there is only ever one row for "WLAN 1" in this table.
● Time interval [ms]
The time interval between acquiring two measured values in milliseconds.
● Samples
The number of measurements.
● Recorded Samples
Number of currently taken measurements or the number of measurements taken during
the last recording
● Status
The status of the recording
– stopped
There is currently no recording of the signal strength.
– started
The signal strength is being recorded.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
220
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
● Start
Click the button in this column to start recording the signal strength.
Note
• If you start a new recording, the previous recording will be overwritten.
• When the device restarts, the measured values are deleted.
● Stop
Click the button in this column to stop recording the signal strength prematurely. If the
specified number of measurements has been made, recording of the signal strength
stops automatically.
Notes on usage
Note the following tips that will help you to obtain useful measurements with the signal
recorder:
● Set a fixed data rate on the access point.
● If you have activated iPCF, set as low a cycle time on the access point as possible for the
measurements.
● Make sure that there is enough data communication during the measurement because
the statistics functions evaluate incoming data frames.
● The measurement path should be traveled 2 to 3 times with the same parameters to find
out whether losses of signal strength always occur at the same position.
● Selective measurements at a fixed position should be made over a longer period of time.
Note
• If you start a new recording, the previous recording will be overwritten.
• When the device restarts, the measured values are deleted.
Procedure
1. Enter the values required for the interval between two measurements and the number of
measurements.
2. Click the "Start" button, the display "started" appears in the "Status" column.
3. When "stopped" is displayed again in the "Status" column, recording of the signal
strength has been completed.
4. Change to one of the following menu items to call up the result of the recording:
– System > Load&Save > HTTP
Click the "Save" button in the "WLANSigRec" table row to save the file
"signal_recorder_SCALANCE_W700.zip" in the file system of the connected PC.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
221
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
– System > Load&Save > TFTP
If necessary, change the file name "signal_recorder_SCALANCE_W700.zip" in the
"WLANSigRec" table row. In the table row "WLANSigRec", select the "Save file" entry
from the drop-down list and click the "Set Values" button.
5. The ZIP file contains two files with the results of the recording:
– A PDF file
– A CSV file
Measurement results
PDF file
The PDF file contains information on the configuration of the device and detailed information
about all individual measurements. There is also a graphic representation of the curve of the
RSSI values in dBm and the data rate.
If the client changes the access point (roaming) during the measurement, this is indicated by
vertical black bars with a black square at the tip. The range > -35 dBm (blue) is the
overmodulation range, in other words the WLAN card overmodulates.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
222
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
CSV file
The CSV file contains information on the configuration of the device and detailed information
on all individual measurements and is divided into two areas: The first area contains the
configured settings:
● The system name of the client
● The IP address of the device
● The MAC address of the device
● The total number of measured values
● The interval between acquisition of two measured values
● The maximum data rate
● The setting of the external antennas
● The maximum possible transmit power
The second area is a table. The table contains the following for each measured value:
● The consecutive number of the measurement
● The time stamp
● The BSSID
● The received signal strength in % and in dBm
● The raw value of the RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication)
● The roaming indicator. The indicator changes between 0 and 1 with each roam
● The channel on which the client is connected to the access point
● The average data rate (if there is no data exchange between the access point and client,
the data rate is "0")
● The name of the access point
● The current channel (this can also be the channel that the client is currently scanning)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
223
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.6 "Interfaces" menu
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
224
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
5.7
"Layer 2" menu
5.7.1
VLAN
5.7.1.1
General
VLAN configuration page
On this page, you define the VLAN and specify the use of the ports.
Note
Changing the Agent VLAN ID
If the configuration PC is connected directly to the device via Ethernet and you change the
agent VLAN ID, the device is no longer reachable via Ethernet following the change.
Important rules for VLANs
Make sure you keep to the following rules when configuring and operating your VLANs:
Frames with the VLAN ID "0" are handled as untagged frames but retain their priority value.
As default, all ports on the device send frames without a VLAN tag to ensure that the end
node can receive these frames.
With SCALANCE W devices, the VLAN ID 1 is the default on all ports.
If an end node is connected to a port, outgoing frames should be sent without a tag (static
access port). If, however, there is a further switch at this port, the frame should have a tag
added (trunk port).
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
225
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Base Bridge Mode" drop-down list
Specify whether or not the device is configured as a bridge according to IEEE 802.1D for
the Spanning Tree protocol or according to IEEE 802.1Q for a virtual bridged LAN:
– 802.1 D Transparent Bridge
Sets the mode of the device to "transparent" for the Spanning Tree protocol.
– 802.1 Q VLAN Bridge
Sets the mode of the device to "VLAN-aware" for a virtual bridged LAN. Configure the
port-based VLAN
● Input box "VLAN ID"
Enter the VLAN ID in the "VLAN ID" input box.
Range of values: 1 ... 4094
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
● VLAN ID
Shows the VLAN ID. The VLAN ID (a number between 1 and 4094) can only be assigned
once when creating a new data record and can then no longer be changed. To make a
change, the entire data record must be deleted and created again. Up to 8 VLANs can be
defined.
● Name
Enter a name for the VLAN. The name only provides information and has no effect on the
configuration. The length is a maximum of 32 characters.
● Status
Shows the status type of the entry in the port filter table. Here, static means that the
address was entered as a static address by the user.
● List of ports
Specify the use of the port. The following options are available:
– "-"
The port is not a member of the VLAN.
With a new definition, all ports have the identifier "-".
– M
The port is a member of the VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded with the
corresponding VLAN tag.
– U (uppercase)
The port is an untagged member of the VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are
forwarded without the VLAN tag. Frames without a VLAN tag are sent from this port.
– u (lowercase)
The port is an untagged member of the VLAN, but the VLAN is not configured as a
port VLAN. Frames sent in this VLAN are forwarded without the VLAN tag.
– F
The port is not a member of the specified VLAN. You can configure other settings in
"Layer 2 > VLAN > Port-based VLAN".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
226
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Procedure
1. Enter an ID in the "VLAN ID" input box.
2. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table. As default, the boxes
have "-" entered.
3. Enter a name for the VLAN under Name.
4. Specify the use of the port in the VLAN. If, for example you select M, the port is a
member of the VLAN. The frame sent in this VLAN is forwarded with the corresponding
VLAN tag.
5. Specify the mode of the device.
6. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
227
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
5.7.1.2
Port-based VLAN
Processing received frames
On this page, you specify the configuration of the port properties for receiving frames.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
228
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Port
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
● Priority / Port VID / Acceptable Frames / Ingress Filtering
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all ports. If "No Change" is selected, the entries
of the corresponding column in Table 2 remain unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
Note
Table 1 is only available if at least one VLAN is configured.
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the available ports and interfaces.
● Priority
From the drop-down list, select the priority given to untagged frames.
The CoS priority (Class of Service) used in the VLAN tag. If a frame is received without a
tag, it will be assigned this priority. This priority specifies how the frame is further
processed compared with other frames.
There are a total of eight priorities with values 0 to 7, where 7 represents the highest
priority (IEEE 802.1p Port Priority).
● Port VID
Select the VLAN ID from the drop-down list. Only VLAN IDs defined on the "VLAN >
General" page can be selected.
If a received frame does not have a VLAN tag, it has a tag with the VLAN ID specified
here added to it and is sent according to the rules at the port.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
229
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
● Acceptable Frames
Specify which types of frames will be accepted. The following alternatives are possible:
– Tagged Frames Only
The device discards all untagged frames. Otherwise, the forwarding rules apply
according to the configuration.
– All
The device forwards all frames.
● Ingress Filtering
Specify whether the VID of received frames is evaluated
You have the following options:
– Enabled
The VLAN ID of received frames decides whether they are forwarded: To forward a
VLAN tagged frame, the receiving port must be a member in the same VLAN. Frames
from unknown VLANs are discarded at the receiving port.
– Disabled
All frames are forwarded.
Procedure
1. In the row of the port to be configured, click on the relevant cell in the table to configure it.
2. Enter the values to be set in the input boxes as follows.
3. Select the values to be set from the drop-down lists.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.7.2
Dynamic MAC Aging
Protocol settings and switch functionality
The device automatically learns the source addresses of the connected nodes. This
information is used to forward frames to the nodes specifically involved. This reduces the
network load for the other nodes.
If a device does not receive a frame whose source address matches a learnt address within
a certain time, it deletes the learnt address. This mechanism is known as "Aging". Aging
prevents frames being forwarded incorrectly, for example when an end device (for example a
programming device) is connected to a different port.
If the check box is not enabled, a device does not delete learnt addresses automatically.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
230
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Dynamic MAC Aging" check box
Enable or disable the function for automatic aging of learned MAC addresses:
● "Aging Time [s]" input box
Enter the time in seconds. After this time, a learned address is deleted if the device does
not receive any further frames from this sender address. The range of values is from 10
seconds to 1000000 seconds
Procedure
1. Select the "Dynamic MAC Aging" check box.
2. Enter the time in seconds in the "Aging Time [s]" input box.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.7.3
Spanning Tree
5.7.3.1
General
General settings of spanning tree
On this page, you configure the settings for MSTP. As default, Rapid Spanning Tree is
enabled that can be set to the MSTP, RSTP or STP compatible mode with a switch.
On the configuration pages of these functions, you can make detailed settings.
Depending on the compatibility mode, you can configure the corresponding function on the
relevant configuration page.
Note
Client device not as root
Using the configuration of priorities and path costs, make sure that a client device can never
become the root node. If a client device becomes the root node the Rapid Spanning Tree
function no longer works.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
231
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Check box "Spanning Tree"
Enable or disable MSTP.
● Drop-down list "Protocol Compatibility"
Select the compatibility mode of MSTP, for example if you select RSTP, MSTP behaves
like RSTP.
The following settings are available:
– STP
– RSTP
– MSTP
Note
If iPCF mode is enabled, only the compatibility modes STP and RSTP are supported.
Procedure
1. Select the "MSTP" check box.
2. From the "Protocol Compatibility" drop-down list, select the type of compatibility.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
232
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
5.7.3.2
CIST General
MSTP-CIST configuration
The page consists of the following parts.
● The left-hand side of the page shows the configuration of the device.
● The central part shows the configuration of the root bridge that can be derived from the
spanning tree frames received by an device.
● The right-hand side shows the configuration of the regional root bridge that can be
derived from the MSTP frames received by an device. The displayed data is only visible if
you have enabled "MSTP" on the "General" page and when "Protocol Compatiblity" is set
to "Spanning Tree". This also applies to the "Bridge Max Hop Count" parameter. If the
device is a root bridge, the information on the left and right matches.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Bridge Priority" / "Root Priority" input box
The Bridge priority decides which device becomes the root bridge. The bridge with the
highest priority becomes the root bridge. The lower the value, the higher the priority. If
several devices in a network have the same priority, the device whose MAC address has
the lowest numeric value will become the root bridge. Both parameters, bridge priority
and MAC address together form the bridge identifier. Since the root bridge manages all
path changes, it should be located as centrally as possible due to the delay of the frames.
The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of 4096 with a range of values from 0
to 61440.
● Bridge Adresse / Root Adresse
The bridge address shows the MAC address of the device and the root address shows
the MAC address of the root bridge.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
233
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
● Root Port
Shows the port via which the switch communicates with the root bridge.
● Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.
● Topologie Changes / Last Topology Change
The entry for the device shows the number of reconfiguration actions due to the spanning
tree mechanism since the last startup. For the root bridge, the time since the last
reconfiguration is displayed as follows:
– Seconds: sec unit after the number
– Minutes: min unit after the number
– Hour: hr unit after the number
● "Bridge Hello Time [s]" / "Root Hello Time [s]" input box
Each bridge regularly sends configuration frames (BPDUs). The interval between two
such frames is the Hello time. The default for this parameter is 2 seconds.
● "Bridge Forward Delay [s]" / "Root Forward Delay [s]" input box
New configuration data is not used immediately by a bridge but only after the period
specified in the forward delay parameter. This ensures that operation is started with the
new topology only after all the bridges have the required information. The default for this
parameter is 15 seconds.
● "Bridge Max Age" / "Root Max Age" input box
Bridge Max Age defines the maximum "age" of a received BPDU for it to be accepted as
valid by the switch. The default for this parameter is 20.
● "Bridge Max Hop Count" input box
This parameter specifies how many MSTP nodes a BPDU may pass through. If an MSTP
BPDU is received and has a hop count that exceeds the value configured here, it is
discarded. The default for this parameter is 20.
● Regional Root Priority
For a description, see Bridge Priority / Root Priority
● Regional Root Address
The MAC address of the device.
● Regional Root Cost
The path costs from this device to the root bridge.
● "Region Name" input box
Enter the name of the MSTP region to which this device belongs. As default, the MAC
address of the device is entered here. This value must be the same on all devices that
belong to the same MSTP region.
● "Region Version" input box
Enter the version number of the MSTP region in which the device is located. This value
must be the same on all devices that belong to the same MSTP region.
● "Reset Counters" button
The values are reset with this button.
● "Layer-2 Tunnel Admin Edge Port" check box (available only in access point mode)
Select this check box if there can be an end device on a layer 2 tunnel port. Otherwise a
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
234
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
reconfiguration of the network will be triggered whenever a link to this port is modified.
The L2T clients should be interconnected.
●
"Layer-2 Tunnel Auto Edge Port" check box (available only in access point mode)
Select this check box if you want to detect automatically whether or not an end device is
connected at all layer 2 tunnel ports.
Procedure
1. Enter the data required for the configuration in the input boxes.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.7.3.3
CIST Port
MSTP-CIST port configuration
When the page is called, the table displays the current status of the configuration of the port
parameters.
To configure them, click the relevant cells in the port table.
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Column 1
Shows that the settings made in this table will be adopted for all ports of table 2 after
clicking the "Copy to Table" button.
● Spanning Tree Status
In the drop-down list, select the setting for all ports. If "No Change" is selected, the entries
of the corresponding column in table 2 remain unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
235
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Port
Shows all available ports and the following interfaces.
– Port X
– WLAN X
– VAP X.Y
– WDS X.Y
● Spanning Tree Status
Specify whether the port is integrated in the spanning tree or not.
Note
If you disable the "Spanning Tree Status" option for a port, this may cause the formation
of loops. The topology must be kept in mind.
● Priority
Enter the priority of the port. The priority is only evaluated when the path costs are the
same.
The value must be divisible by 16. If the value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is
automatically adapted.
Range of values: 0 - 240.
The default is 128.
● Cost Calc
Enter the path cost calculation. If you enter the value "0" here, the automatically
calculated value is displayed in the "Path Cost" box.
● Path Cost
The path costs from this port to the root bridge. The path with the lowest value is selected
as the path. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with the lowest port
number is selected.
If the value in the "Cost Calc" field is "0", the automatically calculated value is displayed.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc" box is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher
the achievable transmission speed is, the lower the value of the path costs.
Typical values for path costs with rapid spanning tree:
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
The values can, however, also be set individually.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
236
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
● State
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed and cannot be
configured. The "State" parameter depends on the configured protocol. The following is
possible for status:
– Disabled
The port only receives and is not involved in STP, MSTP and RSTP.
– Discarding
In the "Discarding" mode, BPDU frames are received. Other incoming or outgoing
frames are discarded.
– Listening
In this status, BPDUs are both received and sent. The port is involved in the spanning
tree algorithm.
– Learning
Stage prior to the forwarding status, the port is actively learning the topology (in other
words, the node addresses).
– Forwarding
Following the reconfiguration time, the port is active in the network; it receives and
forwards data frames.
● Fwd. Trans
Specifies the number of changes from the "Discarding" status to the "Forwarding" status.
● Edge Type
Specify the type of the edge port. You have the following options:
– "-"
Edge port is disabled. The port is treated as a "no EdgePort".
– Admin
Select this option when there is always an end device on this port. Otherwise a
reconfiguration of the network will be triggered each time a connection is changed.
– Auto
Select this option if you want a connected end device to be detected automatically at
this port. When the connection is established the first time, the port is treated as a "no
Edge Port".
– Admin/Auto
Select these options if you operate a combination of both on this port. When the
connection is established the first time, the port is treated as an Edge Port.
● Edge
Shows the status of the port.
– Enabled
An end device is connected to this port.
– Disabled
There is a spanning tree or rapid spanning tree device at this port.
With an end device, a switch can change over the port faster without taking into account
spanning tree frames. If a spanning tree frame is received despite this setting, the port
automatically changes to the "Disabled" setting for switches.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
237
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
● P.t.P. Type
Select the required option from the drop-down list. The selection depends on the port that
is set.
– P.t.P.
Even with half duplex, a point-to-point link is assumed.
– Shared Media
Even with a full duplex connection, a point-to-point link is not assumed.
Note
Point-to-point link means a direct connection between two devices. A shared media
connection is, for example, a connection to a hub.
– "-"
Point to point is calculated automatically. If the port is set to half duplex, a point-topoint link is not assumed.
● P.t.P.
– Enabled
Shows that a point-to-point link exists.
– Disabled
Shows that no point-to-point link exists
● Hello Time
Enter the interval after which the bridge sends configuration BPDUs. As default, 2
seconds is set.
Range of values: 1-2 seconds
Note
The port-specific setting of the Hello time is only possible in MSTP compatible mode.
Procedure
1. In the input cells of the table row, enter the values of the port you are configuring.
2. From the drop-down lists of the cells of the table row, select the values of the port you are
configuring.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
238
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
5.7.3.4
MST general
Multiple Spanning Tree configuration
With MSTP, in addition to RSTP, several VLANs can be managed in a LAN with separate
RSTP trees.
Description
The page contains the following box:
● MSTP Instance ID
Enter the number of the MSTP instance.
Permitted values: 1 - 64
You can define up to 8 MSTP instances.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the row you want to delete.
● MSTP Instance ID
Shows the number of the MSTP instance.
● Root Address
Shows the MAC address of the root bridge
● Root Priority
Shows the priority of the root bridge.
● Bridge Priority
Enter the bridge priority in this box. The value for the bridge priority is a whole multiple of
4096 with a range of values from 0 to 61440.
● VLAN ID
Enter the VLAN ID. Here, you can also specify ranges with Start ID, "-", End ID. Several
ranges or IDs are separated by ",".
Permitted values: 1- 4094
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
239
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Procedure
Creating a new entry
1. Enter the number of the MSTP instance in the "MSTP Instance ID" box.
2. Click the "Create" button.
3. Enter the identifier of the virtual LAN in the "VLAN ID" input box.
4. Enter the priority of the bridge in the "Bridge Priority" input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Deleting entries
1. Use the check box at the beginning of the relevant row to select the entries to be deleted.
2. Click the "Delete" button to delete the selected entries from memory. The entries are
deleted from the memory of the device and the display on this page is updated.
5.7.3.5
MST Port
Configuration of the Multiple Spanning Tree port parameters
On this page, you set the parameters for the ports of the configured multiple spanning tree
instances.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
240
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Column 1
Shows that the settings are valid for all ports of table 2.
● MSTP Status
Select the setting for all ports from the drop-down list. If "No Change" is selected, the
entries of the corresponding column in Table 2 remain unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the setting is adopted for all ports of table 2.
The page contains the following box:
● "MSTP Instance ID" drop-down list
In the drop-down list, select the ID of the MSTP instance.
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Port
Shows all available ports and interfaces.
● MSTP Instance ID
ID of the MSTP instance.
● MSTP Status
Click the check box to enable or disable this option.
● Priority
Enter the priority of the port. The priority is only evaluated when the path costs are the
same.
The value must be divisible by 16. If the value that cannot be divided by 16, the value is
automatically adapted.
Range of values: 0 - 240.
The default is 128.
● Cost Calc
Enter the path cost calculation in the input box. If you enter the value "0" here, the
automatically calculated value is displayed in the next box "Path Cost".
● Path Cost
The path costs from this port to the root bridge. The path with the lowest value is selected
as the path. If several ports of a device have the same value, the port with the lowest port
number is selected.
If the value in the "Cost Calc" field is "0", the automatically calculated value is displayed.
Otherwise, the value of the "Cost Calc" field is displayed.
The calculation of the path costs is largely based on the transmission speed. The higher
the achievable transmission rate, the lower the value for the path costs will be.
Typical values for rapid spanning tree are as follows:
– 1000 Mbps = 20,000
– 100 Mbps = 200,000
– 10 Mbps = 2,000,000
The values can, however, also be set individually.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
241
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
● State
Displays the current status of the port. The values are only displayed and cannot be
configured. The following is possible for status:
– Discarding
The port exchanges MSTP information but is not involved in the data traffic.
– Blocked
In the blocking mode, BPDU frames are received.
– Forwarding
The port receives and sends data frames.
● Fwd. Trans.
Specifies the number of status changes Discarding - Forwarding or Forwarding Discarding.
Procedure
1. In the input cells of the table row, enter the values of the port you are configuring.
2. From the drop-down lists of the cells of the table row, select the values of the port you are
configuring.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.7.4
DCP Forwarding
Applications
The DCP protocol is used by STEP 7 and the PST Tool for configuration and diagnostics.
When shipped, DCP is enabled on all ports; in other words, DCP frames are forwarded at all
ports. With this option, you can disable the sending of these frames for individual ports, for
example to prevent individual parts of the network from being configured with the PST Tool
or to divide the full network into smaller parts for configuration and diagnostics.
All the ports of the device are displayed on this WBM page.
Note
Empty table
If you have enabled NAT on the device, the table is empty or will be emptied.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
242
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the available ports.
● Setting
Specify whether the port should block or forward outgoing DCP frames. You have the
following options available:
– Block
No outgoing DCP frames are forwarded via this port. It is nevertheless still possible to
receive via this port.
– Forward
The DCP frames are forwarded via this port.
Procedure
1. Specify whether the port blocks or forwards the DCP frames.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.7.5
LLDP
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
PROFINET uses the LLDP protocol for topology diagnostics.
In the factory settings, LLDP is activated on the interface, in other words LLDP frames are
sent and received. LLDP is supported only by the Ethernet interface and by the SFP
interface P1.
On this WBM page, you activate or deactivate the sending or receiving of LLDP frames on
the interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
243
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.7 "Layer 2" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Port
Shows the port.
● Setting
Specify the LLDP functionality. The following options are available:
– Tx
This port can only send LLDP frames.
– Rx
This port can only receive LLDP frames.
– Rx & Tx
This port can receive and send LLDP frames.
– "-" (Disabled)
This port can neither receive nor send LLDP frames.
Procedure
1. Select the required LLDP functionality from the drop-down list.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
244
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.8 "Layer 3" menu
5.8
"Layer 3" menu
5.8.1
NAT
5.8.1.1
Basic
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
On this page, you specify the basic settings for NAT.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Drop-down list "Interface"
From the drop-down list, select the required Ethernet interface.
● Check box "Enable NAT"
Enable or disable NAT for the Ethernet interface. Can only be enabled if "Own" is set on
the client for "MAC Mode".
● Input box "TCP Idle Timeout [s]"
Enter the required time in seconds. If no data exchange takes place, the TCP connection
is deleted from the translation table when this time has elapsed.
The range of values is 1 to 4294967295.
Default setting: 86400 seconds
● Input box "UDP Idle Timeout [s]"
Enter the required time in seconds. If no data exchange takes place, the UDP connection
is deleted from the translation table when this time has elapsed.
The range of values is 1 to 4294967295.
Default setting: 300 seconds
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
245
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.8 "Layer 3" menu
● Input box "Local Interface IP address"
Enter the local IP address of the Ethernet interface. This IP address is the gateway
address of the local device.
● Input box "Local Interface Subnet Mask"
Enter the subnet mask for the local Ethernet.
Procedure
1. In the "Local Interface IP addresses" input box, enter the local IP address of the Ethernet
interface.
2. In the "Local Interface Subnet Mask" input box, enter the subnet mask for the local
Ethernet
3. Enable NAT for the Ethernet interface.
4. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.8.1.2
NAPT
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
On this WBM page, you define the translation list for communication from the global to the
local network. Per WLAN client (NAT gateway), 60 entries are possible.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Interface" drop-down list
Interface to which the settings relate. Can only be selected if the device has several
interfaces.
● "Traffic Type" drop-down list
Specify the protocol for which the address assignment is valid. TCP and UDP frames
must have parameters set separately.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
246
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.8 "Layer 3" menu
● "Global Port" input box
Enter the global port. Incoming frames with this port as the destination port are
forwarded. If the setting is intended to apply to a port range, enter the range with start
port "-" end port, for example 30 - 40.
Note
If the port is already occupied by a local service, for example Telnet, a warning is
displayed. In this case, avoid using TCP port 23 (Telnet), port 22 (SSH), ports 80/443
(http/https: reachability of the client with the WBM) and UDP port 161 (SNMP) as global
port.
● "Local IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address of the node in the local network.
● "Local Port" input box
Enter the number of the port. This is the new destination port to which the incoming frame
will be forwarded. If the setting is intended to apply to a port range, enter the range with
start port "-" end port, for example 30 - 40.
If the local port and global port are the same, the frames will be forwarded without port
translation.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
● Enable
Select the check box in the required row. The entry is used for the address assignment
● Interface
Shows the interface to which the settings relate.
● Traffic Type
Shows whether UDP or TCP frames are assigned to the global port.
● Dynamic Global IP
Shows whether or not dynamic address conversion is used.
● Global IP Address
Shows the global IP address to which the local IP address will be translated.
● Global Port
Shows the global port.
● Local IP Address
Shows the IP address of the node in the local network.
● Local Port
Shows the number of the local port.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
247
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Procedure
1. From the "Traffic Type" drop-down list, select the protocol for which the address
assignment is valid.
2. Enter the number of the global port or a port range in "Global Port".
3. Enter the IP address of the node in the local network in "Local IP Address".
4. Enter the number of the local port or a port range in "Local Port".
5. Click the "Create" button. A new entry is generated in the table.
6. Click the "Set Values" button. The device is restarted.
5.9
"Security" menu
5.9.1
Passwords
Configuration of the device passwords
Changes to the device passwords for administrator and users can only be made locally by
the administrator.
Procedure
1. From the "Username" drop-down list, select the user whose password you want to
change.
Select between "Admin" and "User".
2. Enter the valid administrator password in the "Current Admin Password" input box.
3. Enter the new password for the selected user in the "New Password" input box. The new
password must be at least 6 characters long.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
248
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
4. Repeat the new password in the "Password Confirmation" input box.
5. Click the "Set Values" button.
Note
The factory settings for the passwords when the devices ship are as follows:
• admin: admin
• user: user
If you log on the first time or log on after a "Restore Factory Defaults and Restart", you
will be prompted to change the password.
Note
Changing the password in Trial mode
Even if you change the password in Trial mode, this change is saved immediately.
5.9.2
WLAN
5.9.2.1
Basic
Safety levels
To make the network secure, authentication and encryption are used. On this page, you
specify the security settings.
Note
Transmission standard IEEE 802.11 n
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11 n with the setting "802.11n" or "802.11 n only"
supports only WPA2/ WPA2-PSK with AES in the security settings.
iPCF or iPCF-MC mode activated
If iPCF or iPCF-MC mode is enabled, only "Open System" with the encryption method AES
is supported in the security settings.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
249
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Interface
Shows the available interfaces.
● Authentication Type
Select the type of authentication. The selection depends on the operating mode and the
transmission standard.
– Open System
There is no authentication. Encryption with a fixed (unchanging) WEP key can be
selected as an option. To use the key, enable "Encryption". You define the WEP key
on the "Keys" page.
If iPCF or iPCF-MC mode is enabled, only the encryption method AES with 128 bit key
length is supported.
– Shared Key
In Shared Key authentication, a fixed key is stored on the client and access point. This
WEP key is then used for authentication and encryption. You define the WEP key on
the "Keys" page.
Note
If you use "Open System" with "Encryption" or "Shared Key", Key 1 must always be
set on the "Keys" page.
– WPA (RADIUS)
Wi-Fi Protected Access is a method specified by the Wi-Fi Alliance to close security
gaps in WEP. Authentication using a server is stipulated (802.1x). The dynamic
exchange of keys at each data frame introduces further security.
– WPA-PSK
WPA Pre Shared Key (WPA-PSK) is a weakened form of WPA. In this method,
authentication is not established by a server but is based on a password. This
password is configured manually on the client and server.
– WPA2 (RADIUS)
WPA2 (Wi-Fi Protected Access 2) is a further development of WPA and implements
the functions of the IEEE 802.11i security standard. WPA authentication works,
however, without the RADIUS server.
– WPA2-PSK
WPA2-PSK is based on the 802.11i standard. WPA authentication works, however,
without a RADIUS server. Instead of this, a WPA(2) key (WPA(2) pass phrase) is
stored on each client and access point. The WPA(2) pass phrase is used for
authentication and further encryption.
– WPA/WPA2-Auto-PSK
Setting with which an access point can process both the "WPA-PSK" as well as the
"WPA2-PSK" type of authentication. This is necessary when the access point
communicates with different clients, some using "WPA-PSK" and others "WPA2-PSK".
The same encryption method is set on the clients.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
250
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
– WPA/WPA2-Auto
Setting with which an access point can process both the "WPA" as well as the "WPA2"
type of authentication. This is necessary when the access point communicates with
different clients, some using "WPA" and others "WPA2". The same encryption method
is set on the clients
● Encryption
Encryption protects the transferred data from eavesdropping and corruption. You can
only disable encryption if you have selected "Open System" for authentication. All other
security methods include both authentication and encryption.
● Cipher
Select the encryption method. The selection depends on the transmission standard.
– AUTO
AES or TKIP is used depending on the capability of the other station.
– WEP
WEP (Wired Equivalent Privacy)
A symmetrical stream encryption method with only 40- or 104-bit long keys based on
the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4).
– TKIP (Temporal Key Integrity Protocol)
A symmetrical encryption method with the RC4 algorithm (Ron’s Code 4). In contrast
to the weak WEP encryption, TKIP uses changing keys derived from a main key. TKIP
can also recognize corrupted data frames.
– AES (Advanced Encryption Standard)
Strong symmetrical block encryption method based on the Rijndael algorithm that
further improves the functions of TKIP.
Note
To provide better protection of your data against attacks, use WPA2/ WPA2-PSK with
AES.
● WPA(2) Pass Phrase
Enter a WPA(2) key here. This WPA(2) key must be known both at the client end and on
the access point and is entered by the user at both ends.
ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used for the WPA(2) key.
● WPA(2) Pass Phrase Confirmation
Confirm the entered WPA(2) key.
● Default key
Specify the WEP key used to encrypt the data. You define the WEP key on the "Keys"
page.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
251
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Procedure
1. Select the required security settings. Which settings are possible depends on the
"Authentication Type" you have selected.
Authentication Type
Encryption
Cipher
Encryption key source
Open System
disabled
--
--
Open System
enabled
WEP
Default key
Open System
enabled
AES1)
Default key (128-bit)
Shared Key
enabled
WEP
Default key
WPA (RADIUS)
enabled
Auto/TKIP/AES
RADIUS Server
WPA-PSK
enabled
Auto/TKIP/AES
WPA(2) Pass Phrase
WPA2 (RADIUS)
enabled
Auto/TKIP/AES
RADIUS Server
WPA2-PSK
enabled
Auto/TKIP/AES
WPA(2) Pass Phrase
WPA/WPA2-AutoPSK
enabled
Auto/TKIP/AES
WPA(2) Pass Phrase
WPA/WPA2-Auto
(RADIUS)
enabled
Auto/TKIP/AES
RADIUS Server
1)
available only with iPCF or iPCF-MC
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.9.2.2
AP Communication
Communications options
On this page, you specify the type of communication allowed by the access point.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
252
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Description
Table 1 has the following columns:
● Column 1
All ports shows that the settings will be adopted for all ports of table 2 after clicking the
"Copy to Table" button.
● within own VAP / with other VAPs / with Ethernet
In the drop-down list, select the settings for all ports of table 2. If "No Change" is selected,
the entry in table 2 remains unchanged.
● Copy to Table
If you click the button, the settings are adopted for all ports of table 2.
Table 2 has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Port
Shows the VAP interface.
● within own VAP
– Enabled
Clients logged on to the same VAP interface of an access point can communicate with
each other.
– Disabled
Option is disabled.
● with other VAPs
– Enabled
Clients logged on to different VAP interfaces of an access point can communicate with
each other.
– Disabled
Option is disabled.
Note
For an Access Point , "with other VAP" must be enabled on all WLAN interfaces or on
all VAPs to allow communication between clients logged on at different VAP interfaces
of the access point.
● with Ethernet
– Enabled
Clients can communicate via the Ethernet interface of the access point.
– Disabled
Option is disabled.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
253
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
5.9.2.3
AP Radius Authenticator
Configuration of the RADIUS server
On this page, you define the RADIUS servers and the RADIUS authentication of the access
point. You can enter data for two RADIUS servers.
Note
This tab is available only in access point mode.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● Reauthentication Mode
Specify who sets the time after which the clients are forced to reauthenticate.
– Disabled
Reauthentication mode is disabled.
– Server
Enables time management on the server.
– Local
Enables local time management. In "Reauthentication Interval", specify the time of
validity.
● Reauthentication Interval [s]
If time management is local, enter the period of validity of the authentication in seconds.
The minimum time is 1 minute (enter 60), the maximum time is 12 hours (enter 43200).
The default is one hour (3,600 seconds).
The table has the following columns:
● Server IP Address
Here, enter the IP address or the FQDN name of the RADIUS server.
● Server Port
Enter the input port on the RADIUS server.
● Shared Secret
Enter the password of the RADIUS server.
For the password, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
254
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
● Shared Secret Confirmation
Confirm the password.
● Max. Retransmissions
Enter the maximum number of connection attempts.
● Primary Server
Specify whether or not this server is the primary server.
– yes: Primary server
– no: Backup server.
● Status
With this check box, you can enable or disable the RADIUS server
Procedure
Entering a new server
To display a new server, follow the steps below:
1. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– IP address or FQDN name of the RADIUS server.
– Port number of the input port
– Password
– Confirmation of the password
– Maximum number of transmission retries
– Primary server
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Modifying servers
1. In the relevant row, enter the following data in the input boxes:
– Server IP address
– Port number of the input port
– Password
– Confirmation of the password
– Maximum number of transmission retries
– Primary server
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
Repeat this procedure for every server whose entry you want to modify.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
255
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
5.9.2.4
Client Radius Supplicant
Client Supplicant
On this page, you configure the settings for the RADIUS authorization of the client.
Note
This tab is only available in the client mode.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the WLAN interface.
● Dot1x Username
Enter the user name with which you want to log on to the RADIUS server.
● Dot1x User Password
Here, enter the password for the user name selected above. The client logs on with the
RADIUS server using this combination.
For password assignment, ASCII code 0x20 to 0x7e is used.
● Dot1x User Password Confirmation
Confirm the password.
● Dot1x Check Server Certificate
Specify whether or not the RADIUS server identifies itself to the client using a certificate.
● Dot1x EAP Types
Specify the authentication method. The following methods are available:
– Auto
EAP-TLS, EAP-TTLS or PEAP is used depending on the capability of the other
station.
– EAP-TLS
Client logs on using a certificate.
– EAP-TTLS
The client logs on with the RADIUS server using the user name and password
– PEAP
The client logs on with the RADIUS server using the user name and password.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
256
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Procedure
1. Enter the necessary values in the input boxes.
2. Select the required entry in the "Dot1x EAP Types" drop-down list.
3. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.9.2.5
Keys
Specifying the WEP key
To allow you to enable the encryption for the "Open System" and "Shared Key"
authentication methods, you must first enter at least one key in the key table.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Shows the available WLAN interfaces.
● Key 1 - 4
Enter the WEP key or the AES key.
For the WEP key, characters of the ASCII code from 0x20 to 0x7E or hexadecimal
characters from 0x00 to 0xFF are permitted.
If iPCF or iPCF-MC mode is enabled, only the encryption method AES with 128-bit key
length is supported.
You can choose between the following key lengths:
– 5 or 13 ASCII or 10 or 26 hexadecimal characters (40/104 bits)
– 16 ASCII or 32 hexadecimal characters (128 bits)
Note
The hexadecimal characters are entered without being preceded by "0x". One
hexadecimal character codes four bits. The entries "ABCDE" (ASCII characters) and
"4142434445" (hexadecimal characters) are therefore the same because the ASCII
character "A" has hexadecimal code "0x41".
● Key 1 - 4 Confirmation
Confirm the WEP key.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
257
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Procedure
1. Enter at least one WEP key.
2. Click the "Set Values" button.
5.9.3
Management ACL
Description of configuration
On this page, you can increase the security of your device. To specify which station with
which IP address is allowed to access your device, configure the IP address or an entire
address range.
You can select the protocols and the ports of the station with which it is allowed to access
the device. You define the VLAN in which the station may be located. This ensures that only
certain stations within a VLAN have access to the switch.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Management ACL" check box
Enable or disable the function.
● "IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address or the network address to which the rule will apply. If you use the IP
address 0.0.0.0, the settings apply to all IP addresses.
● "Subnet Mask" input box
Enter the subnet mask. The subnet mask 255.255.255.255 is for a specific IP address. If
you want to allow a subnet, for example a C subnet, enter 255.255.255.0. The subnet
mask 0.0.0.0 applies to all subnets.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
● Rule Order
Shows the number of the rule. If you click the "Create" button, a new row with a unique
number is created
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
258
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
● IP Address
Shows the IP address.
● Subnet Mask
Shows the subnet mask.
● VLANs Allowed
Only available if 802.1Q VLAN Bridge is set for "Layer 2 > VLAN > General".
Enter the number of the VLAN in which the device is located. The station can only access
the device if it is located in this configured VLAN. If this input box remains empty, there is
no restriction relating to the VLANs.
● SNMP
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) accesses the device using the SNMP
protocol.
● TELNET
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) accesses the device using the TELNET
protocol.
● HTTP
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) accesses the device using the HTTP
protocol.
● HTTPS
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) accesses the device using the HTTPS
protocol.
● SSH
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) accesses the device using the SSH
protocol.
● Px
Specify whether the station (or the IP address) accesses the device via this port.
● WLAN 1 (client mode only)
Specify whether or not the station or the IP address accesses the device via the WLAN
interface.
● VAP X.Y (access point mode only)
Specify whether or not the station or the IP address accesses the device via the VAP
interface.
● WDS X.Y (access point mode only)
Specify whether or not the station or the IP address accesses the device via the WDS
interface.
Procedure
Changing the entry
1. Configure the data of the entry you want to modify.
2. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer the changes to the device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
259
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Creating new entry
1. In the "IP Address" input box, enter the IP address of the device and in the "Subnet
Mask" input box the corresponding subnet mask.
2. Click the "Create" button to create a new row in the table.
3. Configure the entries of the new row.
4. Click the "Set Values" button to transfer the new entry to the device.
Deleting entries
1. Select the check box in the row to be deleted.
2. Repeat this procedure for every entry you want to delete.
3. Click the "Delete" button. The entries are deleted and the page is updated.
Note
Note that a bad configuration may mean that you can no longer access the device.
You can then only remedy this by resetting the device to the factory defaults and then
reconfiguring.
5.9.4
Inter AP blocking
5.9.4.1
Basic
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUGs:
– W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
– W700 Security (MLFB 6GK5907-0PA00)
When should Inter AP blocking be used?
The clients connected to an access point can normally communicate with all devices of the
layer 2 network.
With inter AP blocking, the communication of the clients connected to the access point can
be restricted. Only the devices whose IP addresses are configured in "Allowed Addresses"
on the access point are accessible to the clients. Communication with other nodes in the
network is therefore prevented.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
260
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
Description
The page contains the following box:
● "Refresh interval [s]" input box
Enter the refresh interval for the ARP table.
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
● Port
Specifies the VAP interface to which the settings relate.
● SSID
Specifies the SSID to which the settings relate.
● Enable
When enabled, the access restriction is used. You configure which devices are
accessible to the clients in "Security > Inter AP Blocking > Allowed Adresses".
● Block Gratuitous ARP Request
When enabled, gratuitous ARP packets are not forwarded.
● Block Non-IP Frames
When enabled, there is no exchange of non-IP packets, for example layer 2 packets
between the client and the devices configured on the access point as permitted
communications partners.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
261
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.9 "Security" menu
5.9.4.2
Allowed address
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUGs:
– W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
– W700 Security (MLFB 6GK5907-0PA00)
On this page you specify which devices are accessible to the clients.
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Port" drop-down list
Select the required port from the drop-down list.
● IP Address" input box
Enter the IP address of the devices accessible to the client.
The table has the following columns:
● Select
Select the check box in the row to be deleted
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate
● Port
Specifies the VAP interface to which the settings relate
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
262
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
● IP Address
The IP address of the devices accessible to the client. If necessary, you can change the
IP address.
● Resolver IP Address
The IP address with which the permitted IP address is resolved. The entry is necessary
when the management IP address is located in a different subnet.
If the IP address "0.0.0.0" is configured for "Resolve IP Address", the management IP
address is used for resolution.
5.10
"iFeatures" menu
5.10.1
iPCF
Note
This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUGs:
• Access point: W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
• Client: W740 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-4PA00)
When should iPCF be used?
The use of iPCF is advisable particularly if you have a large number of nodes and want to
implement highly deterministic operation. This is necessary, for example with PNIO or other
cyclic protocols. You will find a more detailed description of iPCF in the section "Technical
basics" in the section "iPCF / iPCF-MC".
Note
• iPCF and iPCF-MC are not compatible with each other and cannot be used at the same
time on a device.
The possible settings differ for access point and client. Below, both will be described.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
263
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
Access point mode
You are using an access point in access point mode.
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
● Enable iPCF
Enable or disable iPCF mode. For PNIO communication, we recommend that you enable
the iPCF mode. By enabling iPCF, the data rates provided by the access point are
adapted. We strongly recommend that you retain the default setting for the data rates
(802.11 a/b/g = 12 Mbps and 802.11n = MCS 2).
● PNIO Support
Enable or disable optimized support of PNIO.
● iPCF Cycle Time [ms]
Select the required cycle time from the drop-down list.
The following points need to be taken into account when setting the cycle time. Otherwise
it may not be possible to establish stable communication.
– There is only one access point in the system; in other words, the clients move only in
one wireless cell. In this case, update times >= 16 ms are supported.
– There are several access points in the system that communicate over different
channels. The clients roam between the access points. In this case, select update
times >= 32 ms.
In addition to the guide values shown above, remember that the shortest cycle time to be
set is calculated according to the formula "2 ms * max. number of nodes".
● Scanning Mode
The selected setting affects the scanning of the logged-on clients.
The following settings are available:
– All Channels
The client scans all permitted channels and selects the access point with the best
signal strength and connects to it.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
264
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
– Next Channel
The client scans the next channel from its permitted channel list. If an access point is
there, it connects to it. If it does not find an access point on this channel, it scans the
next channel.
● Signal Quality Threshold
Can only be edited if "Scanning Mode" "Next Channel" is enabled. The client is given a
minimum signal strength with which the access point must be seen during the scan so
that a connection can be established to it.
The following threshold values exist for the signal strength:
Level
Signal quality in RSSI
Signal quality in %
1
20
40
2
25
50
3
30
60
4
35
70
5
40
80
Procedure
1. Select the "Enable iPCF" option for the required WLAN interface.
2. Select the required cycle time from the "iPCF Cylce Time [ms]" drop-down list.
3. Select for example "All Channels" from the "Scanning Mode"drop-down list.
4. Click the "Set Values" button
You configure the security settings in "Security > WLAN > Basic".
Client mode
You use a client or an access point in client mode.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
265
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
● Enable iPCF
Enable or disable iPCF mode. For PNIO communication, we recommend that you enable
the iPCF mode. By enabling iPCF, the data rates provided by the access point are
adapted.
Procedure
1. Select the "Enable iPCF" option for the required WLAN interface.
2. Click the "Set Values" button
You configure the security settings in "Security > WLAN > Basic".
5.10.2
iPCF-MC
Requirements to be able to use iPCF-MC:
● The access point has at least two WLAN interfaces (dual AP).
● Access point mode: Only dual APs with KEY-PLUG W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 9078PA00)
● Client mode: Client with KEY-PLUG W740 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-4PA00)
● The management interface and data interface must be operated in the same frequency
band and mode and must match in terms of their wireless coverage. iPCF-MC will not
work if both wireless interfaces are equipped with directional antennas that cover different
areas.
● The management interfaces of all access points to which a client can change must use
the same channel. A client scans only this one channel to find accessible access points.
● Transmission based on IEEE801.11h (DFS) cannot be used for the management
interface. 801.11h (DFS) is possible for the data interface.
● The client cannot be operated with "Use Allowed Channel only".
● "Force roaming on Ethernet down" is automatically mirrored on the second interface.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
266
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
When should iPCF-MC be used?
iPCF was developed to achieve short handover times when roaming between cells. The
iPCF-MC technique allows short handover times even for freely mobile clients and when a
lot of cells are involved or a large number of channels is being used.
Note
• iPCF and iPCF-MC are not compatible with each other and cannot be used at the same
time on a device.
• With 11n devices, remember that the assignment of the WLAN interfaces is fixed for
iPCF-MC.
– WLAN1: Data interface
– WLAN2: Management interface
In access point mode
In client mode
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
267
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
Description
The page contains the following boxes:
● "Enable iPCF-MC" check box
Enable or disable the iPCF-MC mode of the device.
For PNIO communication, we recommend enabling the iPCF-MC mode. By enabling
iPCF-MC, the data rates provided by the access point are adapted.
We strongly recommend that you retain the default setting for the data rates (802.11 a/b/g
= 6, 9 and 12 Mbps and 802.11n = MCS 2).
● "iPCF Cycle Time" drop-down list (only in access point mode)
Select the PNIO update time configured for the network to which the access point is
connected. The lowest value for the update time is 32 ms.
● "Management Scan Period" drop-down list (only in client mode)
This parameter specifies the time between two client management channel scans
(specified in iPCF cycles). If, for example, you select two, the client runs a management
channel scan only in every second iPCF cycle.
A lower value for the scan interval provides the basis for fast roaming, however this
means that no high data throughput can be achieved. A higher value should be selected
for a high data throughput.
5.10.3
iREF
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUG:
– Access point: W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
When should iREF be used?
With iREF, the data can be sent with the highest possible transmit power. This applies in
particular to use cases in which MIMO cannot be used, is of no advantage or when using
sector antennas.
Note
Use of iREF with other iFeatures
iREF and other iFeatures (e.g. iPCF, iPCF-MC) are not compatible with each other and
cannot be used at the same time on a device.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
268
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
● Enable iREF
Enable or disable iREF for the required WLAN interface. The result is shown in
"Information > WLAN >iFeatures".
Note
To be able to use iREF, there must be at least two antennas.
The antennas are automatically switched to Mode RX/TX as soon as iREF is enabled.
5.10.4
AeroScout
Note
• This tab is available only in access point mode.
• This WBM page can only be configured with the following KEY-PLUG:
Access point: W780 iFeatures (MLFB 6GK5 907-8PA00)
Note
The AeroScout function cannot be combined with other iFeatures (iPCF, iPCF-MC, iREF).
AeroScout can only be used in the 2.4 GHz band according to IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n
and IEEE 802.11n-only.
For more detailed information, please refer to the documentation of the AeroScout company
(www.aeroscout.com).
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
269
Configuring with Web Based Management
5.10 "iFeatures" menu
Description
The table has the following columns:
● Radio
Specifies the WLAN interface to which the settings relate.
● Enable AeroScout
Enable or disable AeroScout for the required WLAN interface. The result is shown in
"Information > WLAN iFeatures" AeroScout.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
270
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Upkeep and maintenance
6.1
6
Firmware update - via WBM
Requirement
● The device has an IP address.
● The "admin" user is logged on.
Firmware update via HTTP
1. Click "System > Load&Save" in the navigation area. Click the "HTTP" tab.
2. Click the "Load" button in the "Firmware" table row.
3. Go to the storage location of the firmware file.
4. Click the "Open" button in the dialog. The file is uploaded.
Firmware update - via TFTP
1. Click "System > Load&Save" in the navigation area. Click the "TFTP" tab.
2. Enter the IP address of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server IP Address" input box.
3. Enter the port of the TFTP server in the "TFTP Server Port" input box
4. Click the "Load file" button in the "Firmware" table row.
5. Go to the storage location of the firmware file.
6. Click the "Open" button in the dialog. The file is uploaded.
Result
The firmware is has been transferred completely to the device and under "Information >
Versions" there is also the entry "FirmwareRunning". FirmwareRunningshows the version of
the current firmware. Firmware shows the firmware version stored after loading the firmware.
To activate this firmware, restart the device with "System > Restart".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
271
Upkeep and maintenance
6.2 Restoring the default parameter settings
6.2
Restoring the default parameter settings
Procedure
Follow the steps below to reset the device parameters to the factory settings:
Note
When you reset the device parameters, all previously changed settings are lost!
1. Turn off the power to the device.
2. Now press the Reset button and reconnect the power to the device while holding down
the button.
3. Hold down the button until the red fault LED (F) stops flashing after approximately 10
seconds and is permanently lit.
4. Now release the button and wait until the fault LED (F) goes off again.
5. The device then starts automatically with the default parameters.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
272
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Troubleshooting/FAQ
7.1
7
Firmware update via WBM or CLI not possible
Cause
If there is a power failure during the firmware update, it is possible that the device is no
longer accessible using Web Based Management or the CLI.
Solution
You can then also assign firmware to a SCALANCE W700 using TFTP.
Follow the steps below to load new firmware using TFTP:
1. Turn off the power to the device.
2. Now press the Reset button and reconnect the power to the device while holding down
the button.
3. Hold down the button until the red fault LED (F) starts to flash after approximately 2
seconds.
4. Now release the button. The bootloader waits in this state for a new firmware file that you
can download by TFTP.
5. Connect a PC to the SCALANCE W700 over the Ethernet interface.
6. Assign an IP address to the SCALANCE W700 with the Primary Setup Tool.
7. Open a DOS box and change to the directory where the file with the new firmware is
located and then execute the command "tftp -i <ip address> PUT <firmware>". As an
alternative, you can use a different TFTP client.
Note
Use of CLI and TFTP in Windows 7
If you want to access the CLI or TFTP in Windows 7, make sure that the relevant functions
are enabled in Windows 7.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
273
Troubleshooting/FAQ
7.2 Disrupted data transmission due to the received power being too high
Result
The firmware is transferred to the device.
Note
Please note that the transfer of the firmware can take several minutes. During the
transmission, the red error LED (F) flashes.
Once the firmware has been transferred completely to the device, the device is restarted
automatically.
7.2
Disrupted data transmission due to the received power being too
high
Causes and effects of excessive received power
If the received power at the input of a WLAN is too high, this overdrives the amplifier circuit.
Overdrive can occur on clients and access points. If the receive power on the device is
greater than -40 dBm, this can result in disrupted communication.
Information about the signal strength [in dBm] is displayed in WBM on the following tabs:
Information > WLAN > Client List
Client mode: Information > WLAN > Client List > Available AP list
The power of the input signal on the IWLAN device is influenced by the following factors:
● Distance between the WLAN partners
● Reflections of the electromagnetic waves by parts of the building
● Setting for the "Max. TX Power" (Interfaces > WLAN > Basic) and the antenna settings
used (Interfaces > WLAN > Antennas).
Solution
If communication is disrupted by an excessive signal strength (greater than -40 dBm), you
can eliminate the problem in the following ways:
● Increase the distance between the transmitter and receiver.
● Reduce the transmit power of the IWLAN partner with suitable settings in WBM or CLI.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
274
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Troubleshooting/FAQ
7.3 Compatibility with predecessor products
7.3
Compatibility with predecessor products
Mixed mode
Mixed operation with predecessor products (6GK57xx-xAA60-xAx0) is possible.
Further information about predecessor products can be found on the Internet at Siemens
Industry Automation and Drives Service & Support, entry ID: 42784493
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/42784493)
Note the following points if you want to make mixed operation possible:
● Transmission standard IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n
The transmission standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n are compatible with the predecessor
products. The setting "802.11n only" is not compatible with the predecessor products.
The transmission standards IEEE 802.11a/g/h Turbo of the predecessor products are not
supported.
● Security settings
The transmission standards IEEE 802.11a/b/g support the same security settings as the
predecessor products.
The transmission standard IEEE 802.11n with the setting "802.11n" or "802.11n only"
only supports WPA2/ WPA2-PSK with AES in the security settings.
● SSID
For SSID, use only the characters that were supported by the previous products.
● Management only over wired Ethernet interface
In the previous products, there was a function "Management only over wired Ethernet
interface". In the new devices this function is covered by the "Management ACL
(Page 258)" function.
● WDS ID
With WDS ID, do not use the ASCII character 0x22 ( " ).
● Key for WEP or AES
With devices with firmware up to version 3.2, the keys for WEP or AES may only contain
ASCII characters or hexadecimal characters from 0x20 to 0x7E.
7.4
Instructions for secure network design
Note the following information about protecting your network from attacks:
● Use a secure connection with HTTPS
In contrast to HTTP, HTTPS allows you secure access for configuring the WLAN clients
and the access points using Web Based Management. For more detailed information,
refer to the section "Load&Save (page 135)".
● Use WPA2/ WPA2-PSK with AES
Use only WPA2/AES to prevent password misuse. WPA2/ WPA2-PSK with AES provides
the greatest security. For more detailed information, refer to the section "Security" menu
(Page 248)".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
275
Troubleshooting/FAQ
7.4 Instructions for secure network design
● Protect your network from man-in-the-middle attacks
To protect your network from man-in-the-middle attacks, a network setup is
recommended that makes it more difficult for the attacker to access the communications
path between two end devices.
– You can, for example, protect WLAN devices by arranging so that the Agent IP is only
accessible via a single management VLAN. For more detailed information, refer to the
section "Agent IP (Page 128)".
– A further option is to install a separate HTTPS certificate on the WLAN client / access
point. The HTTPS certificate checks the identity of the device and controls the
encrypted data exchange. You can install the HTTPS certificate, for example using
HTTP. For more detailed information, refer to the section "HTTP (Page 137)".
● Use SNMPv3
SNMPv3 provides you with highest possible security when accessing the WLAN devices
via SNMP. For more detailed information, refer to the section "SNMP (Page 157)".
NOTICE
Changing the default password after configuring with STEP 7
If a device in the default status is configured only with STEP 7, it is not possible to change
the default password. This change must be made directly on the device using WBM or CLI.
Otherwise the default password is retained and any user could log in using the default
password.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
276
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
A
Appendix A
A.1
MIB files supported by SCALANCE W700
MIB files available for the SCALANCE W700
The following table shows the MIB files available for a SCALANCE W700:
MIB
AUTOMATION SNTP
(Siemens) 1) 2)
AUTOMATION SYSTEM MIB
(Siemens) 1) 2)
AUTOMATION TELNET (Siemens) 1) 2)
AUTOMATION TIME MIB
(Siemens) 1) 2)
Root OID
Reference
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.6.3.11
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.6.3.2
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.6.3.8
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.6.3.3
Vendor specific
BRIDGE MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.17
RFC1493
ENTITY-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.47
EtherLike-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.10.7.2
IANA-MAU-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.26.1.1
IEEE8021-PAE-MIB
.1.0.8802.1.1.1
IEEE 802.1X
IEEE802dot11-MIB
.1.2.840.10036
IEEE 802.11
IF-MIB:
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2
RFC2233
P-BRIDGE-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.17.4.5
Q-BRIDGE-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.17.7
RADIUS-ACC-CLIENT-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.67.2.2
RADIUS-AUTH-CLIENT-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.67.1.2
RFC1213-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.4
RMON-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.16
SNMP-COMMUNITY-MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.18
SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.10.2.1
RFC2571
SNMP NOTIFICATION MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.13
RFC2573
SNMP PROXY MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.14
SNMP-TARGET-MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.12
RFC2573
SNMP USER-BASED SM MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.15
RFC2574
SNMPv2-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.1
RFC1907
SNMP VIEW-BASED ACM MIB
.1.3.6.1.6.3.16
RFC2575
SN-MSPS-ACL-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.30
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.1
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-CONFIG-MIB (Siemens)
SN-MSPS-CPLUG-MIB (Siemens)
2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.23
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-DHCP-CLIENT-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.17.1
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-DIGITAL-IO-MIB (Siemens)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.39
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.2
Vendor specific
2)
SN-MSPS-GENERAL-MIB (Siemens)
2)3)
2)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
277
Appendix A
A.1 MIB files supported by SCALANCE W700
MIB
Root OID
Reference
SN-MSPS-HTTP-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.20
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-IF-MIB (Siemens)
2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.34
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-IP-MIB (Siemens)
2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.13
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.35
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.26
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.31
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.6
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-NTP-MIB (Siemens)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.33
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-PNAC-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.10
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-PORT-MIB (Siemens)
SN-MSPS-KEY-PLUG-MIB (Siemens) 2)
SN-MSPS-LOAD-SAVE-MIB (Siemens)
2)
SN-MSPS-LOG-MIB (Siemens) 2)
SN-MSPS-MSTP-MIB (Siemens)
2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.29
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-RADIUS-SERVER-MIB (Siemens)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.11.2
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-REPORT-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.28
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-RMON-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.12
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.25
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.4
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.19.1
Vendor specific
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.40
Vendor specific
2)
2)
SN-MSPS-SINEMA-MIB (Siemens)
SN-MSPS-SNMP-MIB (Siemens)
2)
2)
SN-MSPS-SNTP-CLIENT-MIB (Siemens) 2)
SN-MSPS-STP-L2T-MIB (Siemens)
SN-MSPS-SYSLOG-CLIENT-MIB (Siemens)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.21.1
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-VLAN-MIB (Siemens) 2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.3
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-WLAN-MIB (Siemens)
2)
.1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.27
Vendor specific
SN-MSPS-NAT-MIB
1.3.6.1.4.1.4329.20.1.1.1.1.45
Vendor specific
TCP-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.6
UDP-MIB
.1.3.6.1.2.1.7
1)
2)
Part of the AUTOMATION.MIB
You can download the AUTOMATION.MIB for SCALANCE W700 from Siemens Industry Automation and Drives Service & Support under the following entry ID 67637278
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/67637278)
2)
Part of the private MIB file "Scalance_w_msps.mib". The file can be downloaded in
WBM using "System > Load&Save > HTTP > MIB" and the "Save" button.
3)
This MIB is not supported on devices without a digital input/output.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
278
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Appendix B
B.1
B
Private MIB variables of the SCALANCE W700
Downloading the MIB of the SCALANCE W700 via WBM
The MIB of the SCALANCE W700 can be downloaded in WBM using "System > Load&Save
> HTTP > MIB" and the "Save" button.
OID
The private MIB variables of the SCALANCE W700 have the following object identifiers:
iso(1).org(3).dod(6).internet(1).private(4). enterprises(1)
siemens(4329) industrialComProducts(20) iComPlatforms(1)
simaticNet(1) snMsps(1) snMspsCommon(1)
WLAN-specific MIB variables
The WLAN-specific MIB variables can be found in "snMspsWlan". You will find further
information about the settings and values in the MIB file.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
279
Appendix B
B.1 Private MIB variables of the SCALANCE W700
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
280
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
C
Appendix C
C.1
Underlying standards
Standards met by SCALANCE W700 devices completely or partly
The following table lists some of the standards for SCALANCE W700 devices.
Name of the standard
Topic
IEEE 802.1AB
Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLDP)
IEEE 802.1D-1998
Media Access Control (MAC), bridges
IEEE 802.1Q
Virtual Bridged LANs (VLAN Tagging, Port Based VLANs)
IEEE 802.1W-2004
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
IEEE 802.3-2002
Ethernet
IEEE 802.3af
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
IEEE 802.11
Wireless Local Area Network
IEEE 802.11a
Wireless standard for use of the 5 GHz frequency band
IEEE 802.11b/g
Wireless standard for use of the 2.4 GHz frequency band
IEEE 802.11e
Quality of Service (QoS)
IEEE 802.11 h
Expansion of the spectrum and transmit power for use of the 5 GHz frequency range in Europe.
IEEE 802.11i
Encryption of WLANS
IEEE 802.11n
Standard for high transmission rates
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
281
Appendix C
C.1 Underlying standards
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
282
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
D
Appendix D
D.1
Messages in the event log
Messages during system startup (general)
Alarm
Description
Warm start performed, Ver: V02.00.00 event/status summary after startup
Type of startup and the loaded firmware version.
Power supply:
Status of the power supplies line 1 and line 2.
•
L1 is connected
•
L2 is not connected
No line is monitored
Information about monitoring the power supply from the signaling system.
MSTP disabled
Information on the status of the Spanning Tree protocol.
MSTP enabled
No Fault states pending after startup
Fault state following system start.
Status of the power supply
Alarm
Description
You enable or disable the "Power Change" event in "System > Events".
Power up on line 1 / 2 / PoE.
Power supply exists on line 1, line 2 or PoE..
Power down on line 1 / 2 / PoE.
Power supply interrupted on line 1, line 2 or PoE.
Status of the Ethernet interface
Alarm
Description
You enable or disable the "Link Change" event in "System > Events".
Link up on P1.
A connection exists on the Ethernet interface.
Link down on P1.
No connection exists on the Ethernet interface.
Status of the WLAN interface (in access point mode only)
Messages
Description
Link down up VAP X.Y.
The VAP interface Y on the WLAN interface X is enabled.
Link down on VAP X.Y.
The VAP interface Y on the WLAN interface X is disabled.
WDS Y at WLAN X is up.
A link exists on the WDS interface Y of WLAN interface X.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
283
Appendix D
D.1 Messages in the event log
Messages
Description
WDS Y at WLAN X is down.
No link exists on the WDS interface Y of WLAN interface X.
Overlap-AP found on WLAN X: AP <system name> <MAC>
found on channel <channel number.> <RSSI value>
A further access point was detected on the channel set for
the WLAN interface X or on a neighboring channel.
Overlap-AP aged out on WLAN X: AP <system name>
<MAC> on channel <channel number.> <RSSI value>
The overlapping access point could not be detected during
the configured aging time and was removed from the "Overlap AP" list.
DFS: Radar interference detected on WLAN X at channel
A primary user (e.g. radar or weather station) was detected
<channel number> (frequency <frequency> MHz). Changing on the channel set for WLAN interface X or on a neighboring
to channel <channel number> (frequency <frequency> MHz) channel. The channel will be blocked for 30 min. The access
point changes to the configured alternative channel or to the
next free channel on which there is no primary user.
DFS: channel <channel number> (frequency <frequency>
MHz) aged out from NOL at WLAN X and can be used
again.
No primary user detected on the channel any longer. The
channel was removed from the list of blocked channels and
can be used again
DFS: Radar interference detected on WLAN X at channel
<channel number> (frequency <frequency> MHz). No more
free channels to use!!
A primary user was found on all available channels. There is
no free channel available, the WLAN interface X will be
deactivated until one of the channels becomes available.
Status of the WLAN interface (in client mode only)
Messages
Description
Link up on WLAN X.
The WLAN interface X is enabled.
Link down on WLAN X.
The WLAN interface X is disabled.
Messages on configuration
Messages
Description
WBM: Authentication failure.
When logging in with Web Based Management (WBM), the wrong password was entered. The event can be enabled or disabled in "System -> Events" (authentication failure).
Telnet: Authentication failure.
When logging in via Telnet, the wrong password was entered. The event can be enabled
or disabled in "System -> Events" (authentication failure).
Restart requested
Restart due to a user request. The event can be enabled or disabled in "System ->
Events" (cold/warm start).
Messages about file upload or download
Messages
Description
File upload via HTTP(S): load of FileType <file type> OK
-> restart required
Loading the file via HTTP(S) was successful. A restart is
required.
File upload via HTTP(S): load of FileType<file type> OK
Loading the file via HTTP(S) was successful.
File upload via HTTP(S): validation of FileType <file type>
IDENTICAL
Loading the file via HTTP(S) was successful. The file is
identical to the existing file.
File upload via HTTP(S): validation of FileType <file type>
FAILED
Loading the file via HTTP(S) failed. The file contains errors
or is invalid.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
284
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Appendix D
D.1 Messages in the event log
Messages
Description
File upload via TFTP: load of FileType <file type> OK
-> restart required
Loading the file using TFTP was successful. A restart is
required.
File upload via TFTP: load of FileType <file type> OK
Loading the file using TFTP was successful.
File upload via TFTP: validation of FileType <file type>
IDENTICAL
Loading the file using TFTP was successful. The file is identical to the existing file.
File upload via TFTP: validation of FileType <file type>
FAILED
Loading the file using TFTP failed. The file contains errors
or is invalid.
File upload via TFTP: file transfer of FileType <file type>
FAILED
Loading the file using TFTP failed. The file name is incorrect
or the file does not exist on the server.
File upload via TFTP: file transfer of FileType <file type>
failed. Cannot connect to given IP address
Loading the file using TFTP failed. The TFTP server cannot
be reached or the settings are incorrect.
File download via TFTP: file transfer of FileType <file type>
failed. Cannot connect to given IP address
Saving the file using TFTP failed. The TFTP server cannot
be reached or the settings are incorrect.
Messages error status
Messages
Description
You configure the events in "System > Events".
You configure the monitoring of the power supply and the
link on the Ethernet port in "System > Fault Monitoring".
New fault state: <fault description>
Incoming fault.
<fault description>:"Warm start performed." "Cold start
performed." "Link down on P1." "Link up on P1." "Power
down on line L1 (L2)" "DFS: No channels are available at
WLAN2"
Not all events automatically lead to a fault. On the "Events"
WBM page, you specify which events will be logged, for
example device restart, changed link on the Ethernet port.
Fault state gone: <fault description>
Outgoing fault
<fault description>:"Warm start performed." "Cold start
performed." "Link down on P1." "Link up on P1." "Power
down on line L1 (L2)" "DFS: No channels are available at
WLAN2" "C-PLUG not accepted. See System C-PLUG
mask for details."
New Fault state (reconfiguration): <fault description>
Incoming fault.
<fault description>:"Link down on P1." "Link up on P1."
"Power down on line L1 (L2)"
The event was triggered due to a change in the configuration.
Fault state gone (reconfiguration): <fault description>
Outgoing fault.
<fault description>:"Link down on P1." "Link up on P1."
"Power down on line L1 (L2)".
The event was triggered due to a change in the configuration.
Fault state: <fault description> cleared.
Fault was acknowledged by the user.
<fault description>:"Warm start performed" "Cold start performed".
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
285
Appendix D
D.1 Messages in the event log
Messages about MSTP
Messages
Description
You enable or disable the "Spanning Tree" event in "System > Events"
Spanning Tree: topology change detected.
The topology of the network has changed; the network will be reorganized.
Spanning Tree: new root bridge xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx
detected.
The topology of the network has changed; there is a new root bridge
with MAC address xx:xx:xx:xx:xx:xx in the network.
Messages about security
Messages
Description
RADIUS: Access accepted / rejected for client
<MAC>.
The authentication of the client was successful or not successful.
Messages about message system
Messages
Description
Syslog-Server not reachable!
The configured Syslog server is not accessible.
Unable to send messages to syslog server.
Please check syslog socket configuration.
The syslog server configuration is incomplete.
Unable to send e-mail(s) because of IP connection failure.
Sending of e-mail(s) failed. SMTP server cannot be reached (e.g. network connection interrupted).
Unable to send e-mail(s) because of SMTP authentication failure.
Sending of e-mail(s) failed. Authentication of the client on the SMTP
server incorrect.
Unable to send e-mail(s) because SMTP message transfer failed.
Sending of e-mail(s) failed. SMTP server can be reached, configuration
incomplete or contains errors (e.g. receiver e-mail address wrong /
does not exist).
SNMP: Authentification failure.
Authentication of an SNMP client failed; access not possible (e.g.
SNMPv1/v2 read-only configured or Read Community String incorrectly
configured).
IP communication is possible. Remote logging
activated.
IP communication is possible. Remote logging is activated.
IP communication is not possible. Remote logging deactivated. Please check IP configuration
and network connectivity.
IP communication is not possible. Remote logging is deactivated.
Check whether or not the device has an IP address.
Messages during system startup (PLUG)
Alarm
Description
Startup configuration: Internal storage
PLUG: Not present
There is no PLUG inserted.
Startup configuration: Internal storage
PLUG: Missing
PLUG: License missing
There is no PLUG inserted. There are functions configured on the device for which
a license (KEY-PLUG) is required.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
286
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Appendix D
D.2 Messages in the WLAN authentication log
Alarm
Description
Startup configuration: Internal storage
PLUG: Configuration not accepted
PLUG: License missing
Invalid or incompatible configuration on the inserted PLUG.
Startup configuration: Internal storage
PLUG: Factory clean -> filled with internal configuration
PLUG: Configuration accepted
PLUG: License accepted
The internal configuration was written successfully to an empty KEYPLUG.
Startup configuration: Internal storage
The internal configuration was written successfully to an empty CPLUG.
PLUG: Factory clean -> filled with internal configuration
There are functions configured on the device for which a license (KEYPLUG) is required.
PLUG: Configuration accepted
Startup configuration: PLUG storage
PLUG: Configuration accepted
PLUG: License accepted
Startup configuration: PLUG storage
PLUG: Configuration accepted
The configuration was loaded successfully from the KEY-PLUG.
The configuration was loaded successfully from the C-PLUG.
Messages about PLUG
Messages
Description
An empty PLUG was found.
There is an empty or formatted PLUG in the device.
PLUG: Filled PLUG was found.
PLUG: Configuration Accepted
There is a valid PLUG with a valid configuration in the device.
PLUG: Removed at runtime.
The C-PLUG / KEY-PLUG was removed during operation.
PLUG accepted.
PLUG was accepted.
D.2
Messages in the WLAN authentication log
Messages in access point mode
Alarm
Description
Client <MAC address> <system name> associated successfully.
The client has logged in successfully on the access point.
Client <MAC address> <system name> disassociated
with reason <reason description>
The client was logged off from the access point.
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
287
Appendix D
D.2 Messages in the WLAN authentication log
Messages in client mode
Alarm
Description
Associated successfully to AP <MAC address> <system
name> at channel <channel number> (frequency <frequency> MHz)
The client has logged in successfully on the access point.
Disassociated from AP <MAC address> <'sys name'>
The client was logged off from the access point.
with reason (Disassociated because sending STA is leaving (or has left) BSS)
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
288
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Index
A
Access point
Overlapping channels, 100
Overview, 94
Overview of logged-on clients, 97
WDS list, 98
AeroScout
Configuration, 269, 270
Display configuration, 118
Status code, 118
Aging, 231
Alarm events, 148
Authentication, 163
B
Basic Wizard
Starting, 49
System configuration, 54
Bridge priority, 39
C
Client
Available access points, 103
Overview, 101
Client Supplicant, 256
Collisions, 91
Communications options, 252
Configuration mode, 124
C-PLUG, 23
Formatting, 188
Saving the configuration, 188
CRC, 91
D
Data transmission speed, 212, 214
802.11a/b/g, 212
802.11n, 214
DCP server, 55, 123, 242
DHCP
Client, 150
DNS client, 130
DST
Daylight saving time, 167, 168
E
E-Mail function, 148
Alarm events, 148
Line monitoring, 148
Error status, 82
Ethernet statistics
Interface statistics, 87
Event log table, 79
Events
Log table, 79
F
Fault monitoring
Connection status change, 182
Forward Delay, 234
Fragments, 91
G
Geographic coordinates, 126
Glossary, 12
H
Hardware version, 77
HTTPS
Server, 122
I
IEEE 802.11n, 20, 206
Channel bonding, 22
Frame aggregation, 22
Guard interval, 22
Maximum ratio combining, 21
MIMO, 21
Spatial multiplexing, 21
iFeatures
iREF, 34
Information
ARP table, 78
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
289
Index
Inter AP blocking, 121
Log table, 79
Spanning Tree, 83
Start page, 71
Versions, 75
Inter AP blocking
Allowed Addresses, 262
Basic, 261
Configuration, 260
Information, 121
IP address
Assignment with STEP 7, 44
IP mapping, 105
iPCF, 31
Configuration, 117, 118, 263
How it works, 31, 31
PNIO communication, 31
Restriction, 33
iPCF-MC
PNIO communication, 31
iREF, 34
Configuration, 268
J
Jabbers, 91
K
KEY-PLUG, 23, 185, 189, 189
Formatting, 188
L
Layer 3, 189, 189
Line monitoring, 148
Location, 126
Log table
WLAN Authentication Log, 81
Logging on
via HTTP, 47
via HTTPS, 47
Logout
Automatic, 178
M
Maintenance data, 77
MSTP, 239
Port, 235
Port parameters, 240
MSTP instance, 241, 241
Multichannel configuration, 15
Multiple Spanning Tree, 235, 239
N
NAPT, 36
Configuration, 246
NAT, 36
Configuring, 245
Negotiation, 193
Network access, 17
NTP
Client, 175
O
Order number, 77
Oversize, 91
Overview
Access point, 94
Available access points, 103
Clients, 101
Logged-on clients, 97
Overlap APs, 100
Overlapping channels, 100
WDS partner, 98
P
Packet error statistics, 90
Password, 248
Ping, 191
PLUG, 189, 189
C-PLUG, (C-PLUG)
KEY-PLUG, (KEY-PLUG)
PNIO, 183
point-to-point, 39
Port
Port configuration, 192, 194
Port configuration, 194
Power supply
Monitoring, 180
PROFINET IO, 183
PST tool, 242
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
290
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
Index
R
Reboot, 131
Redundant networks, 233
Reset, 131
RFC
RFC 1518, 41
Root bridge, 39
S
Scope of the manual, 9
Security settings, 160
Serial number, 77
SHA algorithm, 160
Signal recorder, 220
SIMATIC NET glossary, 12
SMTP
Client, 123
SNMP, 37, 55, 123, 157, 160
Groups, 160
SNMPv1, 37
SNMPv2c, 37
SNMPv3, 37
Trap, 159
Users, 162
Software version, 77
Spanning Tree
Information, 83
Rapid Spanning Tree, 39
SSH
Server, 122
Standalone configuration, 13
Start page, 71
STEP 7, 242
Subnet mask, 41
Syslog, 179
Client, 123
System
Configuration, 122
General information, 125
System event log
Agent, 179
System events
Configuration, 145
Severity filter, 147
TFTP
Load/save, 140
Time, 123
Time of day
Manual setting, 165
SIMATIC Time Client, 177
SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), 172
System time, 165
Time zone, 174
Time-of-day synchronization, 172
UTC time, 174
Time setting, 123
U
Undersize, 91
V
Vendor, 77
Vendor ID, 77
VLAN, 29
Port VID, 229
Priority, 229
Tag, 229
W
WDS, 210
Web Based Management, 45
Requirement, 45
Wireless access, 14
WLAN statistics
Bad frames, 107
Received frames, 114
Sent frames, 115
T
Telnet
Server, 122
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03
291
Index
SCALANCE W770/W730 to IEEE 802.11n Web Based Management
292
Configuration Manual, 11/2014, C79000-G8976-C323-03